gén+civ

ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.

① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)

ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s control

α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.

β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.

ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts

α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.

β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.

ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.

ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.

ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.

② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as

ⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).

ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.

③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip

ⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.

ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.

ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.

ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.

④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).

⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.

⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.

⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)

ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)

α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.

β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).

γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.

δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).

ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.

ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.

⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.

⑨ special combinations

ⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.

ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).

⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).

ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).

ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.

⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.

ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.

ⓑ of proximity

α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.

β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

μέσος, η, ον (Hom.+). The distinction between ‘middle’ and ‘among’ for μ. is sometimes rather fluid, and some of the passages here cited may fit equally well under 1 or 2.

① pert. to a middle position spatially or temporally, middle, in the middle.

ⓐ as adj. (of intermediate terms: Pla., Rep. 330b, Pol. 303a) ὁ μέσος αὐτῶν ἀνήρ the man in their midst, apparently surrounded by them Hs 9, 12, 7. μέσης νυκτός at midnight (3 Km 3:20.—B-D-F §270, 2; Rob. 495; Lobeck, Phryn. p. 53; 54; 465) Mt 25:6. ἡμέρας μέσης at midday (Jos., Bell. 1, 651, Ant. 17, 155) Ac 26:13. εἰς μέσην τὴν οἰκοδομήν into the middle of the building Hs 9, 7, 5; cp. 9, 8, 2; 4; 6 (cp. Philo, Fuga 49 εἰς μέσον τὸν ποταμόν; Jos., Ant. 4, 80 εἰς μέσον τὸ πῦρ). ἐσταύρωσαν … μέσον τὸν Ἰησοῦν they crucified Jesus between (them) J 19:18. ἐσχίσθη τὸ καταπέτασμα μέσον the curtain was torn in two Lk 23:45 (cp. Artem. 4, 30 τὸ ἱμάτιον μέσον ἐρρωγέναι). ἐλάκησεν μέσος Ac 1:18 (cp. Aristoph., Ran. 955). ἐν μέσοις τοῖς ὀργάνοις τοῦ διαβόλου in the midst of the tools of the devil 2 Cl 18:2 (for the syntax cp. Gen 2:9 ἐν μέσῳ τῷ παραδείσῳ).

ⓑ as subst. neut. τὸ μ. the middle (on the absence of the art. s. B-D-F §264, 4; cp. Rob. 792) ἀνὰ μέσον τινός (s. ἀνά 1) ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὁρίων within or through the region Mk 7:31. ἀνὰ μ. αὐτῶν between them GPt 4:10; Hs 9, 2, 3; 9, 15, 2. ἀνὰ μ. ἐκκλησίας ἁγίων B 6:16; 4:10; διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μ. τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ between one (congregation) member and another 1 Cor 6:5 (s. ἀνά 1b. Perh. μέσος prompted a shortening of the sentence tending to obscurity; cp. the Stoic expr. μέσα καθήκοντα = καθήκοντα ἃ ἐν μέσῳ ἐστὶ κατορθωμάτων κ. ἁμαρτημάτων: MPohlenz, D. Stoa II ’49, 73f). τὸ ἀρνίον τὸ ἀ. μ. τοῦ θρόνου the lamb who is (seated) on the center of the throne Rv 7:17. ἀνὰ μ. τῆς ὁδοῦ (they made) half their journey GJs 17:3.—διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν through the midst of them (X., An. 1, 4, 4; Aesop. Fab. 147 P.=247 H./201a Ch./152 [I, II] H-H.; Am 5:17; Jer 44:4; Jdth 11:19; 1 Macc 5:46; Ath. 18, 3 ‘between’) Lk 4:30; J 8:59 v.l. διὰ μέσον Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας Lk 17:11 prob. can only mean through Samaria and Galilee; but this raises a practical difficulty, since we should expect to find the provinces mentioned in the opposite order. Perh. the text is damaged (cp. the vv.ll. διὰ μέσου and μέσον; s. B-D-F §222; Rob. 648; JBlinzler, AWikenhauser Festschr. ’54, 46ff. If the v.l. διὰ μέσου Σ. καὶ Γ. should be correct, we could compare Maximus Tyr. 28, 4a διὰ μέσου πίστεως κ. ἀπιστίας=throughout between). For the view that μέσον signifies the area betw. S. and G. s. the comm. Cp. δια B1.—εἰς τὸ μέσον into the middle or center (X., Cyr. 3, 1, 6; Dio Chrys. 19 [36], 24; 3 Km 6:8; Jos., Ant. 9, 149) Mk 3:3; Lk 4:35; 5:19; 6:8; J 20:19, 26 (ἔστη εἰς τὸ μέσον as Vi. Aesopi G 82 P.); Hs 9, 8, 5; also in the middle 9, 6, 1. W. gen. (X., An. 1, 5; 14a; Jer 21:4; 48:7; Sb 6270, 13) εἰς τὸ μ. αὐτῶν in the midst of them 9, 11, 7. Without the art. (LXX; Jos., Vi. 334; SibOr 3, 674) εἰς μ. τοῦ πεδίου in the middle of the plain Hs 9, 2, 1 (εἰς μ.=‘in the middle’, as Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 30 p. 44, 21 Lag.). τί … τὸ ἔριον εἰς μ. τῶν ἀκανθῶν τιθέασιν; Why do they place the wool in the middle of the thorns? 7:11. ἀναστὰς εἰς μ. he arose (and came) forward Mk 14:60 (cp. Theocr. 22, 82 ἐς μέσον=into the middle; Himerius, Or. 63 [=Or. 17], 2 εἰς μέσον ἔρχεσθαι=come into the open; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 1 στὰς εἰς τὸ μ.).—ἐν τῷ μ. among, before (more closely defined by the context, or = in public [so Clearch., Fgm. 45 οἴκοι καὶ μὴ ἐν τῷ μέσῳ; Appian, Liby. 15 §63]) Mt 14:6 (Dio Chrys. 30 [79], 39 ὀρχεῖσθαι ἐν τῷ μέσω; Lucian, Pereg. 8) and into the middle, before (them) (Vi. Aesopi W c. 86 στὰς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ ἔφη) Ac 4:7. Without the art. (LXX) ἐν μέσῳ (on the spelling ἐμ μέσῳ, which occurs several times as v.l., s. B-D-F §19, 1; Mlt-H. 105) abs. into the middle, before (someone) (Appian, Hann. 16 §67, Liby. 14 §59; Jos., Ant. 7, 278) J 8:3; MPol 18:1 and in the middle (Pla., Rep. 558a; Herm. Wr. 4, 3; PLille 1 recto, 5 [259 B.C.]; GrBar 13:4) J 8:9. W. gen. of place (Aeneas Tact. 1529; 1532; TestAbr A 12 p. 90, 21 [Stone p. 28], B 8 p. 113, 3 [St. p. 74]; ParJer 1:2; GrBar 10:2) τῆς θαλάσσης (En 97:7) in the middle of the lake Mk 6:47. τῆς πλατείας through the middle of the street Rv 22:2. ἐν μ. τῆς αὐλῆς in the middle of the courtyard Lk 22:55a; τοῦ τάφου GPt 13:55. ἐν μ. αὐτῆς within it (the city of Jerusalem) Lk 21:21; cp. Dg 12:3; MPol 12:1; 12:2(?). ἐν μ. τοῦ θρόνου καὶ τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων on the center of the throne and among the four living creatures Rv 5:6a (w. double gen. also between: Appian, Hann. 14 §60, Bell. Civ. 5, 23 §92; Arrian, Anab. 1, 20, 2; 3, 28, 8 al.; Lucian, Fugit. 10 ἐν μ. ἀλαζονείας κ. φιλοσοφίας). ἐν μέσῳ τ. θρόνου around (on every side of) the throne 4:6 (but between the throne and a more remote point: RBrewer, JBL 71, ’52, 227–31).—ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας Hb 2:12 (Ps 21:23); cp. Ac 17:22. κατὰ μέσον (Jos., Bell. 5, 207; SibOr 3, 802 κατὰ μέσσον=‘in the middle’ [of the day]) κατὰ μ. τῆς νυκτός about midnight Ac 16:25 D; 27:27.

ⓒ The neut. μέσον serves as adv. (e.g., Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 43 §175 μ.=meanwhile) ἦν μέσον ὡς he was in the center of it as MPol 15:2; and is used as prep. w. gen. (B-D-F §215, 3; Rob. 644. Cp. Hdt. 9, 107, 2; Polyb. 8, 25, 1; Epict. 2, 22, 10; LXX, TestSol; TestAbr A 4 p. 80, 31 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 24:21; Jos., Ant. 6, 65; SibOr 3, 319) μ. τῆς θαλάσσης in the middle of the lake Mt 14:24 v.l.; μ. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς in the midst of a crooked generation Phil 2:15 (cp. Maximus Tyr. 36, 5a ἐν μέσῳ τῷ σιδηρῷ τούτῳ γένει).

② pert. to a position within a group, without focus on mediate position, among.

ⓐ as adj. ἐκάθητο ὁ Πέτρος μέσος αὐτῶν Peter was sitting among them Lk 22:55 (the point being not as center of attention but inconspicuously in the group; cp. Jos., Ant. 9, 107). μέσος ὑμῶν ἕστηκεν J 1:26 (Jos., Ant. 14, 23). τοῦ πύργου μέσου Hs 9, 8, 2. εἶδον … μέσον αὐτῶν τὸν Παῦλον AcPl Ha 11, 14.

ⓑ as subst. neuter ἀνὰ μέσον τινός (s. ἀνά 1) among someth. Mt 13:25. W. gen. pl. (TestJob 32:6 ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου) in the midst of, among in answer to the questions where and whither (B-D-F §215, 3 app.) Mt 18:2, 20; Mk 9:36; Lk 2:46; 24:36; Ac 1:15; 2:22; 6:15 D; 27:21; Rv 5:6b; cp. 6:6. Of close personal relationship ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν among you = in communion with you Lk 22:27; 1 Th 2:7.—ἐν μ. λύκων among wolves Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 2 Cl 5:2.—W. gen. pl. of things (Alciphron 3, 24, 3) Lk 8:7; Rv 1:13; 2:1. ἐκ (τοῦ) μ. from among (X., An. 1, 5, 14b; oracular response in Diod S 9, 3, 2; LXX=מִתּוֹךְ): αἴρειν τι (or τινά) ἐκ (τοῦ) μέσου (τινῶν) Col 2:14; 1 Cor 5:2 (s. αἴρω 3). ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν ἐκ μ. αὐτῶν Ac 23:10 (s. ἁρπάζω 2a). ἀφορίζειν τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μ. τῶν δικαίων Mt 13:49 (s. ἀφορίζω 1). γίνεσθαι ἐκ μ. 2 Th 2:7 (s. γίνομαι 6b). ἐξέρχεσθαι ἐκ μ. αὐτῶν from among them Ac 17:33; cp. 2 Cor 6:17 (cp. Is 52:11). κύριος λαμβάνει ἑαυτῷ ἔθνος ἐκ μ. ἐθνῶν 1 Cl 29:3 (cp. Dt 4:34).—B. 864. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

πίστις, εως, ἡ (Hes., Hdt.+; ranging in meaning from subjective confidence to objective basis for confidence).

① that which evokes trust and faith

ⓐ the state of being someone in whom confidence can be placed, faithfulness, reliability, fidelity, commitment (X., An. 1, 6, 3; 3, 3, 4; Aristot., Eth. Eud, 7, 2, 1237b, 12; Polyb. 7, 12, 9; 38, 1, 8 al.; Herodian 2, 14, 4 al.; SIG 675, 22; OGI 557, 16; PTebt 27, 6; 51 [II B.C.]; POxy 494, 9; 705, 32; other pap M-M. s.v.; Ps 32:4; Pr 12:22; Jos., Ant. 2, 61; TestAsh 7:7) w. κρίσις and ἔλεος Mt 23:23. (Opp. ἀπιστία as Hes., Op. 370) τὴν πίστιν τοῦ θεοῦ καταργεῖν nullify the faithfulness/commitment of God (cp. Ps 32:4; Hos 2:22) Ro 3:3. πᾶσαν π. ἐνδείκνυσθαι ἀγαθήν show all good faith(fulness) Tit 2:10 (cp. BGU 314, 19 μετὰ πίστεως ἀγαθῆς). W. other virtues Gal 5:22 (on πίστις, πραΰτης cp. Sir 45:4; 1:27). W. ὑπομονή 2 Th 1:4. τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα I have remained faithful or loyal (πίστιν τηρεῖν as Polyb. 6, 56, 13; 10, 37, 5; Jos., Bell. 2, 121; 6, 345; OGI 339, 46f; IBM III, 587b, 5f [Dssm., LO 262=LAE 309, esp. note 3]) 2 Ti 4:7, though this would be classified by some under 3 below. S. also 1c below.

ⓑ a solemn promise to be faithful and loyal, assurance, oath, troth (X., Cyr. 7, 1, 44; 8, 8, 3, Hell. 1, 3, 12; Diod S 14, 9, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 86 §362 μεγάλας πίστεις ἔδωκεν=solemn assurances; 3 Macc 3:10; Jos., Ant. 12, 382) τὴν πρώτην πίστιν ἠθέτησαν 1 Ti 5:12 (s. also ἀθετέω 1 and cp. CIA app. [Wünsch, Praef. p. xv] of a woman who πρώτη ἠθέτησεν τὴν πίστιν to her husband). Cp. Rv 2:3.

ⓒ a token offered as a guarantee of someth. promised, proof, pledge (Pla., Phd. 70b; Isocr. 3, 8; Aristot., Rhet. 1, 1; 3, 13; Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 63; 85: πίστις βεβαία=dependable proof; Polyb. 3, 100, 3; Περὶ ὕψους 39, 3=p. 74, 20 V.; Epict. 1, 28, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 119 §500; Jos., Ant. 15, 69) πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν ἀναστήσας αὐτόν (God has appointed a man [Jesus] to be judge of the world, and) he has furnished proof (of his fitness for this office) to all people by raising him (on πίστιν παρέχειν cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 218 πίστιν παρεῖχε; 15, 260; Polyb. 2, 52, 4 πίστιν παρέσχετο=gave a pledge, security; Vett. Val. 277, 29f) Ac 17:31. JBarton, Biblica 40, ’59, 878–84: π. in 2 Ti 4:7= bond deposited by an athlete. But see 3 below.—WSchmitz, ῾Η Πίστις in den Papyri, diss. Cologne, ’64.

② state of believing on the basis of the reliability of the one trusted, trust, confidence, faith in the active sense=‘believing’, in ref. to deity (Soph. Oed. R. 1445 νῦν γʼ ἂν τῷ θεῷ πίστιν φέροις; Pla., Leg. 12, 966de; Plut. Mor. 402e; 756b; Dio Chrys. 3, 51 παρὰ θεῶν τιμὴ κ. πίστις; Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 226 D.: πίστιν ἐν τ. θεοῖς ἔχειν; Appian, Liby. 57 §248 ἐς θεοὺς πίστις; Ep. 33 of Apollonius of Tyana [Philostrat. I 352, 14]; Herm. Wr. 9, 10 ἐπίστευσε καὶ ἐν τῇ καλῇ πίστει ἐπανεπαύσατο; Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 21 τῆς βεβαίας πίστεως, τὸ μεμαθηκέναι, ὅτι ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ προνοεῖται πάντα. The divinity Πίστις in Plut., Num. 70 [16, 1] and in magic [exx. in Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 234f, among them Aberciusins. 12; PGM 4, 1014 ἀλήθεια καὶ πίστις; 12, 228]; Wsd 3:14; 4 Macc 15:24; 16:22; 17:2; Philo, Abr. 270; 271; 273, Mut. Nom. 182, Migr. Abr. 43f, Conf. Lingu. 31, Poster. Cai. 13 [on faith in Philo s. the lit. given under πιστεύω 2aα]; Jos, C. Ap. 2, 163; 169; Just., A I, 52, 1 πίστιν ἔχειν; 53, 11 πειθὼ καὶ πίστιν … ἐμφορῆσαι), in our lit. directed toward God and Christ, their revelations, teachings, promises, their power and readiness to aid.

ⓐ God: πίστις θεοῦ (cp. Jos., Ant. 17, 179.—Cp. π. καὶ φόβος ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ Theoph. Ant. 1, 7 [p. 72, 26]) faith, trust, confidence in God Mk 11:22; cp. Ac 19:20 D; 1 Cl 3:4; 27:3. π. θείου πνεύμαπος faith in the divine spirit Hm 11:9. ἡ π. τοῦ κυρίου Hs 6, 3, 6. π. (καὶ ἐλπὶς) εἰς θεόν 1 Pt 1:21. π. ἐπὶ θεόν Hb 6:1. ἡ πίστις ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν 1 Th 1:8 (on the constr. w. πρὸς τ. θ. cp. Philo, Abr. 268; 271; 273; Just., D. 121, 2 διὰ τὴν πρὸς τὸν ἥλιον π.).—πίστις can also be characterized as faith in God by the context, without the addition of specific words; so in connection w. OT personalities: Abraham Ro 4:5, 9, 11–13, 16, 19f (s. also 2dα below); 1 Cl 10:7; 31:2; of Rahab 12:1, 8; of Esther 55:6 (ἡ τελεία κατὰ πίστιν). The OT heroes of faith Hb 11:4–33, 39 (w. this catalogue of heroes cp. Il. 4, 457–538; 2 Km 23:8–39; 1 Ch 11:10–12:18; CGordon, Homer, and the Bible: HUCA 26, ’55, 83).—But in Hb it is also true that God is specifically the object of the Christian’s faith, and Christ 12:2 is ὁ τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸς καὶ τελειώτης. Cp. 10:38; 11:3; 13:7. (On faith in Hb s. Schlatter, Der Glaube im NT⁴ 1927, 520ff; BHeigl, Verfasser u. Adresse des Hb 1905, 109–18; GHoennicke, Die sittl. Anschauungen des Hb: ZWT 45, 1902, 26ff; Windisch, Hdb. exc. on Hb 11; Riggenbach and Michel on Hb 11; Strathmann on 10:38. S. ὑπόστασις end.)—ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν Mt 17:20. Opp. doubt 21:21. αἰτεῖν ἐν πίστει μηδὲν διακρινόμενος Js 1:6. ἡ εὐχὴ τῆς πίστεως 5:15 (εὐχή 1). ἡ πίστις τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν faith in the working of God, who raised him from the dead Col 2:12.

ⓑ Christ

α. of belief and trust in the Lord’s help in physical and spiritual distress; oft. in the synopt. gospels: Mt 8:10; 9:2, 22, 29 (κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν); 15:28; Mk 2:5; 4:40; 5:34; 10:52; Lk 5:20; 7:9, 50; 8:25, 48; 17:19; 18:42.—Cp. ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι (the lame man) had faith that he would be cured Ac 14:9.

β. of faith in Christ, designated by the addition of certain words. By the obj. gen. (s. Just., D. 52, 4 διὰ τῆς πίστεως τῆς τοῦ χριστοῦ) πίστις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ faith in Jesus Christ (and sim. exprs. On interp. as obj. gen. s. AHultgren, NovT 22, ’80, 248–63 [lit.]; response SWilliams, CBQ 49, ’87, 431–47.) Ro 3:22, 26; Gal 2:16ab, 20; 3:22; Eph 3:12; Phil 3:9a; Js 2:1; Rv 14:12; cp. 2:13 (ἡ πίστις μου=faith in me, the Human One [Son of Man]); IMg 1:1. (The πίστις Χριστοῦ in Paul is taken as a subj. gen. by JHaussleiter, Der Glaube Jesu Christi 1891, Was versteht Paulus unter christlichem Glauben?: Greifswalder Studien für HCremer 1895, 161–82 and GKittel, StKr 79, 1906, 419ff. See also Schläger, ZNW 7, 1906, 356–58; BLongenecker, NTS 39, ’93, 478–80 [lit. since ’81]; DCampbell, JBL 113, ’94, 265–85; response BDodd, 114, ’95, 470–73.—ADeissmann, Paulus² 1925, 125f [Paul, tr. WWilson, 1926, 162ff], speaks of the mystical gen., ‘faith in Christ’. Likew. HWeber, Die Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff, esp. 231, 3; WWeber, Christusmystik 1924, 82. S. also LAlbrecht, Der Glaube Jesu Christi 1921; OSchmitz, Die Christusgemeinschaft des Pls im Lichte seines Genetivgebr. 1924, 91–134; OHoltzmann, D. Glaube an Jes.: Stromata 1930, 11–25; GTaylor, JBL 85, ’66, 58–76: the passages in Gal=Christ’s reliability as a trustee. Cp. GHoward, HTR 60, ’67, 459–65; MHooker, NTS 35, ’89, 321–42.)—By prepositional phrases: πίστις εἰς Χριστόν (and sim. exprs.) faith in Christ Ac 20:21; 24:24; 26:18; Col 2:5 (Just., D. 40, 1).—Also πίστις ἐν Χριστῷ (and sim.) Gal 3:26; Eph 1:15; Col 1:4; 1 Ti 3:13; 2 Ti 3:15; 1 Cl 22:1. In ἱλαστήριον διὰ πίστεως ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ αἵματι Ro 3:25, ἐν κτλ. prob. goes not w. πίστις, but w. ἱλαστήριον (s. Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.; W-S. §20, 5d).—πίστις, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τ. κύριον Ἰησοῦν Phlm 5.—πίστις διὰ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστοῦ Ac 20:21 D; sim. ἡ πίστις ἡ διʼ αὐτοῦ 3:16b (cp. 1 Pt 1:21).—Jesus Christ is called ἡ τελεία πίστις ISm 10:2.

ⓒ πίστις can also be characterized by an objective gen. of the thing: ἡ πίστις τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ faith in his (Jesus’) name Ac 3:16a. ἡ πίστις τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Phil 1:27. εὐαγγελίων πίστις Dg 11:6. πίστις ἀληθείας 2 Th 2:13.

ⓓ πίστις is found mostly without an obj., faith, firm commitment

α. as true piety, genuine devotion (Sextus 7a and 7; ParJer 6:7), which for our lit. means being a Christian (τὸ ἀληθινὸν πάσχα … πίστει νονούμενον Hippol., Ref. 8, 18, 1; Did., Gen. 54, 11) Lk 18:8 (s. Jülicher, Gleichn. 288); 22:32; Ac 6:5=vs. 8 v.l.; cp. 11:24.—6:7; 13:8; 14:22; 15:9; 16:5; Ro 1:5, 8, 12, 17ab (ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν does not mean a gradation [as, in a way, Appian, Mithrid. 40 §154: Sulla came upon ἕτερον ὅμοιον ἐξ ἑτέρου=one wall, i.e. fortification, after another similar one] or a transition from one kind to another [Himerius, Or.=Ecl. 10, 6 ἐκ ᾠδῆς εἰς ᾠδὴν ἄλλην μετέβαλον=they changed from one kind of song to another], but merely expresses in a rhetorical way that πίστις is the beginning and the end; s. Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc., and a grave-ins [ANock, Sallust. p. xxxiii, 94] ἐκ γῆς εἰς γῆν ὁ βίος οὗτοσ=‘dust is the beginning and the end of human life’.—AFridrichsen, ConNeot 12, ’48, 54); 17c (here and in Gal 3:11 the LXX of Hab 2:4 [DCampbell, JBL 116, ’97, 713–19] is not followed literally, since it has ἐκ πίστεώς μου=‘as a result of my faithfulness’; even in Hb 10:38, where μου does occur, it goes w. δίκαιος, not w. πίστεως); Ro 3:27f (Luther’s addition of the word ‘alone’ in vs. 28 is hard to contest linguistically. Cp., e.g., Diog. L. 9, 6: Heraclitus wrote his work in very obscure language ὅπως οἱ δυνάμενοι προσίοιεν αὐτῷ=in order that only the capable might approach it. S. also Fitzmyer, ABComm. 360–64), 30f; 4:5–20 (s. also 2a above); 5:1f; 9:30, 32; 10:6, 17; 11:20 (opp. ἀπιστία); 12:3, 6 (s. ἀναλογία; for a difft. view 3 below); 14:1, 22 (s. ἐνώπιον 2b; others would place in 2dε), 23ab (but s. ε below); 16:26; 1 Cor 2:5; 15:14, 17; 16:13; 2 Cor 1:24ab; 4:13; 10:15; 13:5; Gal 3:7–26; 5:5, 6 (s. ἐνεργέω 1b); 6:10 (οἱ οἰκεῖοι τῆς πίστεως, s. οἰκεῖος b); Eph 2:8; 3:17; 4:5, 13; 6:16; Phil 1:25 (χαρὰ τῆς πίστεως); 2:17; 3:9b; Col 1:23; 2:7; 1 Th 3:2, 5, 7, 10; 2 Th 1:3, 11; 3:2; 1 Ti 1:2, 4, 5 (π. ἀνυπόκριτος), 19ab; 4:1; 5:8; 6:10, 12, 21 (but s. 3 below); 2 Ti 1:5 (ἀνυπόκριτος π.); 2:18; 3:8; Tit 1:1, 4, 13; 3:15; Phlm 6 (s. κοινωνία 4); Hb 6:12; 10:22, 39 (opp. ὑποστολή); Js 1:3; 2:5; 1 Pt 1:5, 7, 9; 5:9; 2 Pt 1:1; 1J 5:4; 1 Cl 1:2 (ἡ πανάρετος κ. βεβαία π.); ISm 1:1 (ἀκίνητος π.); Hm 5, 2, 1; 12, 5, 4 (both πλήρης ἐν τῇ πίστει full of faith); 5, 2, 3 (π. ὁλόκληρος); 9:6 (ὁλοτελὴς ἐν τ. π.), 7 (opp. διψυχία), 12 (π. ἡ ἔχουσα δύναμιν); 12, 6, 1; Hs 9, 19, 2 (ἀπὸ τῆς π. κενοί); 9, 26, 8 (κολοβοὶ ἀπὸ τῆς π. αὐτῶν).—τὸ ῥῆμα τ. πίστεως Ro 10:8. οἱ λόγοι τῆς π. 1 Ti 4:6. τὸ μυστήριον τῆς π. 3:9. ὁ θεὸς ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως God has opened the door of faith to the Gentiles, i.e. opened the way for them to participate in a new relationship w. God Ac 14:27 (s. also θύρα 1bγ). ἀκοὴ πίστεως Gal 3:2, 5 (s. ἀκοή 2 and 4b). (τὸ) ἔργον (τῆς) π. 1 Th 1:3; 2 Th 1:11 (s. ἔργον 1b). οἱ ἐκ πίστεως the people of faith (s. ἐκ 3b) Gal 3:7, 9. πῶς οὐν [πίστιν εὑρ]ίσκομεν; Ox 1081, 25f (but here [ταῦτα γιγν]ώ̣σκομεν is the preferable restoration w. Till after the Coptic SJCh 90, 2); 32. Of gnostics τοῦ ὄφεως πίστιν ἔχουσιν AcPlCor 2:20.—If the principal component of Christianity is faith, then π. can be understood as the Gospel in terms of the commitment it evokes (cp. SIG 932, 7 [II/I B.C.]) νῦν εὐαγγελίζεται τὴν πίστιν ἥν ποτε ἐπόρθει Gal 1:23 (s. 3 below). Perh. also Ro 1:5.

β. Hb 11:1 defines πίστις as ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις, πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων. There is here no qu. about the mng. of π. as confidence or assurance (s. 2a above), but on its relation to ὑπόστασις as its predication s. under that word.—(Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 18 interprets πιστεύειν in someth. as incapability to see someth. that is apparent only to God.) Paul contrasts walking διὰ εἴδους (εἶδος 3) as the lower degree, with διὰ πίστεως περιπατεῖν 2 Cor 5:7 (s. KDeissner, Pls. u. die Mystik seiner Zeit² 1921, 101ff). On the other hand πίστις is on a higher level than merely listening to Christian preaching Hb 4:2.

γ. πίστις abs., as a Christian virtue, is often coupled w. others of the same kind, esp. oft. w. ἀγάπη: 1 Th 3:6; 5:8; 1 Ti 1:14; 2 Ti 1:13; Phlm 5; B 11:8; IEph 1:1; 9:1; 14:1; 20:1; IMg 1:2; 13:1; IRo ins; ISm ins; 6:1; 13:2; AcPl Ha 8, 35. W. ἀγάπη and other abstracts 2 Cor 8:7; Gal 5:22; Eph 6:23; 1 Ti 2:15; 4:12; 6:11: 2 Ti 2:22; 3:10; Tit 2:2; Rv 2:19; IPhld 11:2; Pol 4:2; Hm 8:9; cp. v 3, 8, 2–5. The triad πίστις, ἐλπίς, ἀγάπη 1 Cor 13:13; cp. also Col 1:4f; 1 Th 1:3; 5:8; B 1:4 (on this triad see s.v. ἀγάπη 1aα). W. ἐλπίς only (cp. 1 Pt 1:21) 1 Cl 58:2. The ζωῆς ἐλπίς is called ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος πίστεως ἡμῶν B 1:6.—W. ἀλήθεια (TestLevi 8:2) 1 Ti 2:7 (cp. the combination POxy 70, 4f [III A.D.]); 1 Cl 60:4. W. δικαιοσύνη Pol 9:2. W. ὑπομονή Rv 13:10; w. ὑπομ. and other abstracts 2 Pt 1:5f; Pol 13:2 (cp. also the following passages already referred to in this section: 1 Ti 6:11; 2 Ti 3:10; Tit 2:2 and Js 1:3 [α above]). W. γνῶσις (Just., D. 69, 1) et al. 2 Pt 1:5f [s. above]; D 10:2. ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν B 1:5. W. φόβος and ἐγκράτεια Hm 6, 1, 1.—(Distinguished from θεία σοφία: Orig., C. Cels. 6, 13, 23.)

δ. faith as fidelity to Christian teaching. This point of view calls for ἔργα as well as the kind of πίστις that represents only one side of true piety: Js 2:14ab, 17, 18abc, 20, 22ab, 24, 26 (ἔργον 1a); Hv 3, 6, 5; Hs 8, 9, 1ab.

ε. Ro 14:22 and 23 π. as freedom or strength in faith, conviction (s. Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.; but s. α above).

ζ. In addition to the πίστις that every Christian possesses (s. 2dα above) Paul speaks of a special gift of faith that belongs to a select few 1 Cor 12:9. Here he understands π. as an unquestioning belief in God’s power to aid people with miracles, the faith that ‘moves mountains’ 13:2 (cp. Mt 17:20.—21:21; s. 2a above). This special kind of faith may be what the disciples had in mind when they asked πρόσθες ἡμῖν πίστιν Lk 17:5; cp. vs. 6. τῇ πίστει φερόμενος ὁ Παυλος AcPl Ha 5, 1.

③ that which is believed, body of faith/belief/teaching (Diod S 1, 23, 8 ἰσχυρὰν πίστιν καὶ ἀμετάθετον=an article of faith that was firm and unshakable [concerning Orpheus and Dionysus]; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 8, 1; Iren., 1, 10, 2 [Harv. I, 92, 1]; Orig., C. Cels., 1, 42, 26; Did., Gen. 156, 23). So clearly Jd 3 (τῇ ἅπαξ παραδοθείσῃ τοῖς ἁγίοις πίστει), 20 (τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑμῶν πίστει.—ἅγιος 1aα). πίστις θεοῦ=that which, acc. to God’s will, is to be believed IEph 16:2.—This objectivizing of the term πίστις is found as early as Paul: Ro 1:5; Gal 1:23 (s. 2dα end) and perh. Gal 3:23–25 (s. Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.). ASeeberg, D. Katechismus der Urchristenheit 1903, 110f, understands 1 Ti 1:19; 4:1, 6; 6:10, cp. 21; 2 Ti 2:18 in this manner. Ro 12:6 (but s. ἀναλογία) and 2 Ti 4:7 are also interpreted in this way by many.—EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 475–86; ASchlatter, D. Glaube im NT⁴ 1927; APott, Das Hoffen im NT in seiner Beziehung zum Glauben1915; ANairne, The Faith of the NT 1920; RGyllenberg, Pistis 1922; WKümmel, D. Glaube im NT: ThBl 16, ’38, 209–21; Dodd 65–68; TTorrance, ET 68, ’57, 111–14; CMoule, ibid. 157.—Synoptics: TShearer, ET 69, ’57, 3–6.—Esp. for Paul: BBartmann, Pls, die Grundzüge seiner Lehre u. die moderne Religionsgeschichte 1914; WMorgan, The Religion and Theology of Paul 1917; WHatch, The Pauline Idea of Faith in Its Relation to Jewish and Hellenistic Religion 1917; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 4:25; FKnoke, Der christl. Glaube nach Pls 1922; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Pls: ZNW 22, 1923, 43–57; EWissmann, Das Verh. v. πίστις und Christusfrömmigkeit bei Pls 1926; MDibelius, Glaube u. Mystik b. Pls: Neue Jahrb. f. Wissensch. u. Jugendbildg. 7, ’31, 683–99; WMundle, D. Glaubensbegriff des Pls ’32 (p. xi–xvi extensive bibliog.); RGyllenberg, Glaube b. Pls: ZWT 13, ’37, 612–30; MHansen, Om Trosbegrebet hos Pls ’37; LMarshall, Challenge of NT Ethics, ’47, 270–77; 298–300; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 310–26 (Engl. tr. KGrobel I ’51, 314–30; for the Johannines II, 70–92, ’55); MMassinger, BiblSacra 107, ’50, 181–94 et al. S. also δικαιοσύνη 3a.—For the Fourth Gosp.: JBuswell, The Ethics of ‘Believe’ in the Fourth Gospel: BiblSacra 80, 1923, 28–37; JHuby, De la connaissance de foi chez S. Jean: RSR 21, ’31, 385–421; RSchnackenburg, D. Glaube im 4. Ev., diss. Breslau ’37; WHatch, The Idea of Faith in Christ. Lit. fr. the Death of St. Paul to the Close of the Second Century 1926.—EGraesser, D. Glaube im Hebräerbrief, ’65.—ABaumeister, D. Ethik des Pastor Hermae, 1912, 61–140.—ESeidl, π. in d. griech. Lit. (to Peripatetics), diss. Innsbruck, ’53; HLjungman, Pistis, ’64; DLührmann, Pistis im Judent., ZNW 64, ’73, 19–38. On faith in late Judaism s. Bousset, Rel.³ 534a (index); also DHay, JBL 108, ’89, 4611–76; DLindsay, Josephus and Faith ’93. On the Hellenistic concept πίστις Rtzst., Mysterienrel.³ 234–36.—DELG s.v. πείθομαι. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

ănĭma, ae, f. ( gen. animāï, Lucr. 1, 112; 3, 150 et saep.; cf. Neue, Formenl. I. p. 12; Lachm. ad Lucr. 1, 29; dat. and abl. plur. regul. animis, Cic. Fam. 14, 14; Lact. Inst. 6, 20, 19; 7, 2, 1; Arn. 2, 18; 2, 30; 2, 33; Aug. Civ. Dei, 13, 18; 13, 19; id. Ver. Relig. 22, 43:

animabus, only in eccl. and later Lat.,

Vulg. Exod. 30, 12; ib. Psa. 77, 18; ib. Matt. 11, 29; ib. Heb. 13, 17 et saep.; Tert. adv. Marc. 4, 34; id. Anim. 33 al.; Aug. Civ. Dei, 19, 23; Prud. c. Symm. 1, 531; Aus. Rer. Odyss. 11; Serv. ad Verg. A. 6, 136 al.; Neue, Formenl. I. p. 29) [v. animus], pr. that which blows or breathes; hence,

Lit., air, a current of air, a breeze, wind (mostly poet.):

ne quid animae forte amittat dormiens,

Plaut. Aul. 2, 4, 23 sq.: vela ventorum animae immittere, Att. ap. Non. p. 234, 9 (Trag. Rel. p. 137 Rib.):

aurarum leves animae,

Lucr. 5, 236:

prece quaesit Ventorum pavidus paces animasque secundas,

he anxiously implores a lull in the winds and a favoring breeze, id. 5, 1229:

impellunt animae lintea,

Hor. C. 4, 12, 2:

Ne dubites quin haec animaï turbida sit vis,

Lucr. 6, 693: Quantum ignes animaeque [p. 121] valent (of the wind in the workshop of Vulcan), Verg. A. 8, 403.—Also of a flame of fire (blowing like the air): noctilucam tollo, ad focum fero, inflo; anima reviviscit, Varr. ap. Non. p. 234, 5.—

Transf.

In gen., the air, as an element, like fire, water, and earth (mostly poet.): aqua, terra, anima et sol, Enn. ap. Varr. R. R. 1, 4, 1:

qui quattuor ex rebus posse omnia rentur, Ex igni, terrā atque animā, procrescere et imbri,

Lucr. 1, 715:

ut, quem ad modum ignis animae, sic anima aquae, quodque anima aquae, id aqua terrae proportione redderet. Earum quattuor rerum etc.,

Cic. Tim. 5:

utrum (animus) sit ignis, an anima, an sanguis,

id. Ac. 2, 39, 124:

si anima est (animus), fortasse dissipabitur,

id. Tusc. 1, 1, 24; 1, 25, 6:

si deus aut anima aut ignis est, idem est animus hominis,

id. ib. 1, 26, 65:

animus ex inflammatā animā constat, ut potissimum videri video Panaetio,

id. ib. 1, 18, 42:

Semina terrarumque animaeque,

Verg. E. 6, 32.—

The air inhaled and exhaled, breath (concr.); while spiritus denotes orig. breathing (abstr.; very freq. in prose and poetry); cf. Cic. N. D. 2, 54, 136:

excipiat animam eam, quae ducta sit spiritu,

Plaut. As. 5, 2, 44:

animam compressi, aurem admovi,

Ter. Phorm. 5, 6, 28 Ruhnk.:

animam recipe,

take breath, id. Ad. 3, 2, 26:

cum spiritus ejus (sc. Demosthenis) esset angustior, tantum continendā animā in dicendo est assecutus, ut, etc.,

Cic. de Or. 1, 61, 261:

ne circuitus ipse verborum sit longior quam vires atque anima patiatur,

id. ib. 3, 49, 191; 3, 46, 181; id. N. D. 2, 54, 136: fetida anima nasum oppugnat, Titin. ap. Non. p. 233, 5 (Com. Rel. p. 136 Rib.); Caecil. ib. 9:

qui non modo animum integrum, sed ne animam quidem puram conservare potuisset,

Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 58: animas et olentia Medi Ora fovent illo, with this the Medes correct their breath, etc., Verg. G. 2, 134:

respiramen iterque Eripiunt animae,

Ov. M. 12, 143; cf. id. F. 1, 425:

animae gravitas,

bad smell of the breath, Plin. 20, 9, 35, § 91; cf. id. 11, 37, 72, § 188; 22, 25, 64, § 132 al.:

artavit clusitque animam,

Luc. 4, 370; so Tac. A. 6, 50:

spes illorum abominatio animae,

Vulg. Job, 11, 20.—Of breath exhaled:

inspirant graves animas,

Ov. M. 4, 498.— Of the air breathed into a musical instrument, a breath of air, Varr. ap. Non. p. 233. 13.—Since air is a necessary condition of life,

1.. The vital principle, the breath of life:

animus est, quo sapimus, anima, quā vivimus,

Non. p. 426, 27 (hence anima denotes the animal principle of life, in distinction from animus, the spiritual, reasoning, willing principle; very freq. in Lucr. and class.): Mater est terra, ea parit corpus, animam aether adjugat, Pac. ap. Non. p. 75, 11 (Trag. Rel. p. 88 Rib.):

tunc cum primis ratione sagaci, Unde anima atque animi constet natura, videndum,

whence spring life and the nature of the mind, Lucr. 1, 131; 3, 158 sq.; so id. 3, 417 sq.; 3, 565; 3, 705; 2, 950; 4, 922; 4, 944; 4, 959; 6, 798; 6, 1223;

6, 1233 et saep.: deus totus est sensuus, totus visuus, totus audituus, totus animae, totus animi, totus sui,

Plin. 2, 7, 5, § 14 Jan:

quaedam (animantia) animum habent, quaedam tantum animam,

Sen. Ep. 58:

anima omnis carnis in sanguine est,

Vulg. Lev. 17, 14 al. —Hence,

In gen., life:

cum anima corpus liquerit,

Att. Trag. Rel. p. 214 Rib.:

Animae pauxillulum in me habet,

Naev. Com. Rel. p. 14 Rib.: Date ferrum, quī me animā privem, Enn. ap. Non. p. 474, 31 (Trag. Rel. p. 37 Rib.): me dicabo atque animam devōvo (i. e. devovero) hostibus, Att. ap. Non. p. 98, 12 (Trag. Rel. p. 283 Rib.):

conficit animam vis volneris,

Att. Trag. Rel. p. 209 Rib.:

adimere animam,

Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 137; so id. Men. 5, 5, 7:

exstinguere,

Ter. Ad. 3, 2, 16:

relinquere,

id. ib. 3, 4, 52:

edere,

Cic. Sest. 38:

de vestrā vitā, de conjugum vestrarum ac liberorum animā judicandum est,

id. Cat. 4, 9, 18:

si tibi omnia sua praeter animam tradidit,

id. Rosc. Am. 50:

libertas et anima nostra in dubio est,

Sall. C. 52, 6:

pauci, quibus relicta est anima, clausi in tenebris, etc.,

id. J. 14, 15; cf.

retinere,

id. ib. 31, 20:

de manu viri et fratris ejus requiram animam hominis,

Vulg. Gen. 9, 5; ib. Matt. 2, 20; ib. 1 Cor. 14, 7:

animam agere,

to give up the ghost, to die, Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 19;

so also efflare,

to expire, id. ib.; id. Mil. 18 fin.; Suet. Aug. 99; so,

exhalare,

Ov. M. 15, 528; and, exspirare, id. ib. 5, 106 (cf. in Gr. thumon apopneein, psuchên ekpneein, bion apopsuchein, etc.):

deponere,

Nep. Hann. 1, 3:

ponere,

Vulg. Joan. 10, 17; 13, 27:

amittere,

Lucr. 6, 1233:

emittere,

Nep. Epam. 9, 3 Br. (so in Gr. aphienai tên psuchên):

proicere,

Verg. A. 6, 436:

purpuream vomit ille animam, said of a wounded man,

id. ib. 9, 349.—In Vulg. Matt. 16, 25 and 26, anima in v. 25 seems to pass to the higher meaning, soul, (cf. infra, II. D.) in v. 26, as hê psuchê in the original also can do.— Poet.:

anima amphorae,

the fumes of wine, Phaedr. 3, 1: Ni ego illi puteo, si occepso, animam omnem intertraxero, draw up all the life of that well, i. e. draw it dry, Plaut. Am. 2, 2, 41.— Trop.:

corpus imperii unius praesidis nutu, quasi animā et mente, regeretur,

Flor. 4, 3:

accentus quasi anima vocis est,

Pompon. p. 67 Lind.—Prov.: animam debere, to owe life itself, of one deeply in debt:

quid si animam debet?

Ter. Phorm. 4, 3, 56 (Graecum proverbium: kai autên tên psuchên opheilei, Don.).—Metaph., applied to plants and other things possessing organic life, Sen. Ep. 58; so Plin. 17, 21, 35, § 152; 31, 1, 1, § 3; 14, 1, 3, § 16 al.—

Meton., a creature endowed with anima, a living being: ova parere solet genu' pennis condecoratum, non animam, Enn. ap. Varr. L. L. 5, 10, 18:

hi (deos) fibris animāque litant,

Stat. Th. 2, 246; Vulg. Gen. 2, 7; ib. Josh. 11, 11; ib. Luc. 9, 56; ib. Act. 2, 43 et saep.:

animae rationis expertes,

Lact. 3, 8.—So esp. of men (as we also say souls for persons; poet. or in post-Aug. prose):

egregias animas, quae sanguine nobis Hanc patriam peperere suo, etc.,

Verg. A. 11, 24:

animae quales nec candidiores, etc.,

Hor. S. 1, 5, 41; Luc. 5, 322:

vos Treveri et ceterae servientium animae,

ministering spirits, Tac. H. 4, 32.—So in enumerations in eccl. Lat.:

hos genuit Jacob sedecim animas,

Vulg. Gen. 46, 18; 46, 22; ib. Act. 2, 41; 7, 14.—Of slaves (eccl. Lat.):

merces animarum hominum,

Vulg. Apoc. 18, 13 (after the use of hê psuchê and). —Hence, also, souls separated from the body, the shades of the Lower World, manes: Unde (ex Averno) animae excitantur, Enn. ap. Cic. Tusc. 1, 16, 37:

tu pias laetis animas reponis Sedibus,

Hor. C. 1, 10, 17; cf. id. S. 1, 8, 29:

animamque sepulcro Condimus,

Verg. A. 3, 67; Ov. M. 7, 612; so id. ib. 8, 488; 10, 41; 14, 411; 15, 158; Suet. Caes. 88; so,

vita: tenuīs sine corpore vitas volitare,

Verg. A. 6, 292.—So in eccl. Lat. of departed spirits:

timete eum, qui potest animam et corpus perdere in Gehennam,

Vulg. Matt. 10, 28 bis:

non derelinques animam meam in Inferno,

ib. Act. 2, 27; ib. Apoc. 6, 9; 20, 4.—

As expressive of love:

vos, meae carissimae animae,

my dearest souls, Cic. Fam. 14, 14; 14, 18:

Pro quā non metuam mori, Si parcent animae fata superstiti,

the dear surviving life, Hor. C. 3, 9, 12; cf.:

animae dimidium meae,

id. ib. 1, 3, 8:

meae pars animae,

id. ib. 2, 17, 5.—

Sometimes for animus, as the rational soul of man.

The mind as the seat of thought (cf. animus, II. A.):

anima rationis consiliique particeps,

Cic. N.D.1, 31, 87:

causa in animā sensuque meo penitus affixa atque insita,

id. Verr. 2, 5, 53:

ingenii facinora, sicut anima, immortalia sunt,

Sall. J. 2, 2.—So often in eccl. Lat.:

ad te Domine, levavi animam meam,

Vulg. Psa. 24, 1; 102, 1; 118, 129:

magnificat anima mea Dominum,

ib. Luc. 1, 46; ib. Act. 15, 24 al.—

As the seat of feeling (cf. animus, II. B.): sapimus animo, fruimur animā: sine animo anima est debilis, Att. ap. Non. p. 426, 29 (Trag. Rel. p. 175 Rib.):

desiderat anima mea ad te, Deus,

Vulg. Psa. 41, 2:

tristis est anima mea,

ib. Matt. 26, 38; ib. Joan. 10, 27 et saep.—

For consciousness (cf. animus, II. A. 3. and conscientia, II. A.):

cum perhibetur animam liquisse,

Lucr. 3, 598; in this phrase animus is more common.

χάρις, ιτος, ἡ (Hom.+) acc. quite predom. χάριν, but χάριτα Ac 24:27; 25:9 v.l.; Jd 4 and pl. χάριτας Ac 24:27 v.l.; 1 Cl 23:1 (Eur., Hel. 1378; Hdt. 6, 41; X., Hell. 3, 5, 16; ins, pap; Zech 4:7; 6:14; EpArist 272, pl. 230.—B-D-F §47, 3; W-S. §9, 7; Mayser 271f; Thackeray 150; Helbing 40f; Mlt-H. 132.—It seems that χάρις is not always clearly differentiated in mng. fr. χαρά; Apollodorus [II B.C.]: 244 Fgm. 90 Jac. says in the second book περὶ θεῶν: κληθῆναι δὲ αὐτὰς ἀπὸ μὲν τ. χαρᾶς Χάριτας• καὶ γὰρ πολλάκις … οἱ ποιηταὶ τ. χάριν χαρὰν καλοῦσιν ‘the [deities] Charites are so called from χαρά [joy], for poets freq. equate χάρις with χαρά’. Cp. the wordplay AcPl Ha 8, 7 χαρᾶς καὶ χάριτος the house was filled with gaiety and gratitude.).

① a winning quality or attractiveness that invites a favorable reaction, graciousness, attractiveness, charm, winsomeness (Hom.+; Jos., Ant. 2, 231) of human form and appearance παῖς λίαν εὐειδής ἐν χάριτι an exceptionally fine-looking and winsome youth AcPl Ha 3, 13. Of speech (Demosth. 51, 9; Ps.-Demetr. [I A.D.], Eloc. §127; 133; 135 al.; Eccl 10:12; Sir 21:16; Jos., Ant. 18, 208) οἱ λόγοι τῆς χάριτος (gen. of quality) the gracious words Lk 4:22. ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν πάντοτε ἐν χάριτι let your conversation always be winsome Col 4:6 (cp. Plut., Mor. 514f; s. also HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 121f; Epict. 3, 22, 90). τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ χάριτος ἐπληροῦτο MPol 12:1 can also be placed here in case χάρις means nothing more than graciousness (s. 4 below); prob. also GJs 7:3 (s. 3b).

② a beneficent disposition toward someone, favor, grace, gracious care/help, goodwill (almost a t.t. in the reciprocity-oriented world dominated by Hellenic influence [cp. e.g. OGI 669, 29] as well as by the Semitic sense of social obligation expressed in the term חֶסֶד [NGlueck, Das Wort ḥesed in alttestamentlichen Sprachgebrauche etc. 1927]. Of a different order and spirit is the subset of reciprocity known as Roman patronage, in which superiority of the donor over the client is clearly maintained)

ⓐ act., that which one grants to another, the action of one who volunteers to do someth. not otherwise obligatory χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ (cp. τῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Κλαυδίου χάριτι OGI 669, 29) Ac 11:2 D; 14:26. τοῦ κυρίου 15:40.—Esp. of the beneficent intention of God (cp. χ. in reference to God: Apollon. Rhod. 3, 1005 σοὶ θεόθεν χάρις ἔσσεται; Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 40 χ. τῶν θεῶν; Ael. Aristid. 13 p. 320 D.; 53 p. 620; Sextus 436b; likew. in LXX, Philo, Joseph.; SibOr 4, 46=189; 5, 330; Ezk. Trag. 162 [Eus., PE 9, 29, 12].—χ. to denote beneficent dispensations of the emperor: OGI 669, 44 [I A.D.]; BGU 19 I, 21 [II A.D.] χάρ. τοῦ θεοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος; 1085 II, 4) and of Christ, who give (undeserved) gifts to people; God: δικαιούμενοι δωρεὰν τῇ αὐτοῦ χάριτι Ro 3:24. Cp. 5:15a, 20f; 6:1; 11:5 (ἐκλογή 1), 6abc; Gal 1:15 (διά A 3e); Eph 1:6f (KKuhn, NTS 7, ’61, 337 [reff. to Qumran lit.]); 2:5, 7, 8; cp. Pol 1:3; 2 Th 1:12; 2:16; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 2:11 (ἡ χάρ. τοῦ θεοῦ σωτήριος; s. Dibelius, Hdb. exc. after Tit 2:14); 3:7; Hb 2:9 (χωρίς 2aα); 4:16a (DdeSilva, JBL 115, ’96, 100–103); 1 Cl 50:3; ISm 9:2; IPol 7:3. ἐν χάρ[ιτι θεοῦ] AcPl Ha 7, 23 (restoration uncertain). κατὰ χάριν as a favor, out of goodwill (cp. Pla., Leg. 740c; schol. on Soph., Oed. Col. 1751 p. 468 Papag.) Ro 4:4 (opp. κατὰ ὀφείλημα), 16.—The beneficence or favor of Christ: διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι Ac 15:11. Cp. Ro 5:15b; 2 Cor 8:9; 1 Ti 1:14; IPhld 8:1. On Ac 2:47 in this sense s. TAnderson, NTS 34, ’88, 604–10.

ⓑ pass., that which one experiences fr. another (Arrian, Anab. Alex. 3, 26, 4) χάριν ἔχειν have favor 3J 4 v.l. πρός τινα with someone=win his respect Ac 2:47 (cp. 2a end; cp. Pind., O. 7, 89f χάριν καὶ ποτʼ ἀστῶν καὶ ποτὶ ξείνων grant him respect in the presence of his townfolk as well as strangers); παρά τινι (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 89 §376) Hm 10, 3, 1, cp. 5, 1, 5. εὑρεῖν χάριν παρά τινι (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 77, end) Lk 1:30; Hs 5, 2, 10; ἐνώπιόν τινος Ac 7:46; GJs 11:2 (JosAs 15:14). ἐν τοῖς μέλλουσι μετανοεῖν among those who are about to repent Hm 12, 3, 3. Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν χάριτι παρὰ θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:52 (an indication of exceptional ἀρετή, cp. Pind. above). Cp. Ac 4:33; 7:10 (ἐναντίον Φαραώ); Hb 4:16b.—ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστίν; what credit is that to you? Lk 6:32–34; s. D 1:3; 2 Cl 13:4. Cp. 1 Cor 9:16 v.l. In these passages the mng. comes close to reward (s. Wetter [5 below] 209ff w. reff.).—Also by metonymy that which brings someone (God’s) favor or wins a favorable response fr. God 1 Pt 2:19, 20.

ⓒ In Christian epistolary lit. fr. the time of Paul χάρις is found w. the sense (divine) favor in fixed formulas at the beginning and end of letters (Zahn on Gal 1:3; vDobschütz on 1 Th 1:1; ELohmeyer, ZNW 26, 1927, 158ff; APujol, De Salutat. Apost. ‘Gratia vobis et pax’: Verb. Dom. 12, ’32, 38–40; 76–82; WFoerster, TW II ’34, 409ff; Goodsp., Probs. 141f. S. also the lit. s.v. χαίρω 2b). At the beginning of a letter χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη (sc. εἴη; New Docs 8, 127f) Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2; Phlm 3; Rv 1:4; without ὑμῖν Tit 1:4. χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 Pt 1:2; 2 Pt 1:2; 1 Cl ins. χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; 2J 3 (on the triplet cp. En 5:7 φῶς καὶ χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη).—At the end ἡ χάρις (τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ etc.) μεθʼ ὑμῶν (or μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν etc.) Ro 16:20, 23 (24) v.l.; 1 Cor 16:23; 2 Cor 13:13; Gal 6:18; Eph 6:24; Phil 4:23; Col 4:18; 1 Th 5:28; 2 Th 3:18; 1 Ti 6:21; 2 Ti 4:22; Tit 3:15; Phlm 25; Hb 13:25; Rv 22:21; 1 Cl 65:2. ἔσται ἡ χάρις μετὰ πάντων τῶν φοβουμένων τὸν Κύριον GJs 25:2. ὁ κύριος τῆς δόξης καὶ πάσης χάριτος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν B 21:9. χάρις ὑμῖν, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ὑπομονὴ διὰ παντός ISm 12:2. ἔρρωσθε ἐν χάριτι θεοῦ 13:2.

③ practical application of goodwill, (a sign of) favor, gracious deed/gift, benefaction

ⓐ on the part of humans (X., Symp. 8, 36, Ages. 4, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 49 §213; Dionys. Hal. 2, 15, 4) χάριν (-ιτα) καταθέσθαι τινί (κατατίθημι 2) Ac 24:27; 25:9. αἰτεῖσθαι χάριν 25:3 (in these passages from Ac χ. suggests [political] favor, someth. one does for another within a reciprocity system. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 108 §506 ἐς χάριν Σύλλα=as a favor to Sulla; ApcSed 8:1 οὐκ ἐποίησάς μοι χάριν=you did me no favor). ἵνα δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε that you might have a second proof of my goodwill 2 Cor 1:15 (unless χάρις here means delight [so in poetry, Pind. et al., but also Pla., Isocr.; L-S-J-M s.v. χάρις IV; cp. also the quot. fr. Apollodorus at the beg. of the present entry, and the fact that χαρά is v.l. in 2 Cor 1:15]; in that case δευτέρα means double; but s. comm.). Of the collection for Jerusalem (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 42 §173 χάριτας λαμβάνειν=receive gifts) 1 Cor 16:3; 2 Cor 8:4, 6f, 19 (DdeSilva, JBL 115, ’96, 101). Cp. B 21:7.—Eph 4:29 may suggest a demonstration of human favor (cp. Plut., Mor. 514e χάριν παρασκευάζοντες ἀλλήλοις), but a ref. to the means by which divine grace is mediated is not to be ruled out (s. b below).

ⓑ on the part of God and Christ; the context will show whether the emphasis is upon the possession of divine favor as a source of blessings for the believer, or upon a store of favor that is dispensed, or a favored status (i.e. standing in God’s favor) that is brought about, or a gracious deed wrought by God in Christ, or a gracious work that grows fr. more to more (so in contrast to the old covenant Mel., P. 3, 16 al.). God is called ὁ θεὸς πάσης χάριτος 1 Pt 5:10, i.e. God, who is noted for any conceivable benefit or favor; cp. B 21:9.—χάριν διδόναι τινί show favor to someone (Anacr. 110 Diehl; Appian, Ital. 5 §10): τὸν δόντα αὐτῷ τὴν χάριν GJs 14:2. ταπεινοῖς δίδωσι χάριν (Pr 3:34) Js 4:6b; 1 Pt 5:5; 1 Cl 30:2; without a dat. Js 4:6a (Menand., Epitr. 231 S. [55 Kö.]). Perh. καὶ ἔβαλλε κύριος … χάριν ἐπʼ αὐτήν GJs 7:3 (but s. 1 above). The Logos is πλήρης χάριτος J 1:14. Those who belong to him receive of the fullness of his grace, χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος vs. 16 (ἀντί 2). Cp. vs. 17. τὴν χάριν ταύτην ἐν ᾗ ἑστήκαμεν this favor (of God) we now enjoy Ro 5:2 (Goodsp.).—5:17; 1 Cor 1:4; 2 Cor 4:15 (divine beneficence in conversion); cp. Ac 11:23; 6:1; Gal 1:6 (by Christ’s gracious deed); 2:21; 5:4; Col 1:6; 2 Ti 2:1; Hb 12:15; 13:9; 1 Pt 1:10, 13; 3:7 (συνκληρονόμοι χάριτος ζωῆς fellow-heirs of the gift that spells life; s. ζωή 2bα); 5:12; 2 Pt 3:18; Jd 4; IPhld 11:1; ISm 6:2. Christians stand ὑπὸ χάριν under God’s gracious will as expressed in their release from legal constraint Ro 6:14f, or they come ὑπὸ τὸν ζυγὸν τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 16:17 (ζυγός 1). The proclamation of salvation is the message of divine beneficence τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 20:24 or ὁ λόγος τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) 14:3; 20:32. Even the gospel message can be called ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ 13:43; cp. 18:27; MPol 2:3. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς χάριτος the Spirit from or through whom (God’s) favor is shown Hb 10:29 (AArgyle, Grace and the Covenant: ET 60, ’48/49, 26f).—Pl. benefits, favors (Diod S 3, 2, 4; 3, 73, 6; Sb 8139, 4 [ins of I B.C.] of Isis; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 190) 1 Cl 23:1.—Nelson Glueck, Das Wort ḥesed etc. 1927, but s. FAndersen, ‘Yahweh, the Kind and Sensitive God’: God Who is Rich in Mercy, ed. PO’Brien/DPeterson ’86.

④ exceptional effect produced by generosity, favor. Of effects produced by divine beneficence which go beyond those associated with a specific Christian’s status (ins μεγάλαι χάριτες τοῦ θεου: FCumont, Syria 7, 1926, 347ff), in the congregations of Macedonia 2 Cor 8:1 and Corinth 9:14; cp. vs. 8; in Rome AcPl Ha 7, 8. The Christian confessor is in full possession of divine grace ISm 11:1. Paul knows that through the χάρις of God he has been called to be an apostle, and that he has been fitted out w. the powers and capabilities requisite for this office fr. the same source: Ro 1:5; 12:3; 15:15; 1 Cor 3:10; 15:10ab (for the subject matter cp. Polyb. 12, 12b, 3 αὐτὸν [Alex. the Great] ὑπὸ τοῦ δαιμονίου τετευχέναι τούτων ὧν ἔτυχεν=whatever he has received he has received from what is divine. [For this reason he does not deserve any divine honors.]); 2 Cor 12:9; Gal 2:9; Eph 3:2, 7f; Phil 1:7.—The χάρις of God manifests itself in various χαρίσματα: Ro 12:6; Eph 4:7; 1 Pt 4:10. This brings into view a number of passages in which χάρις is evidently to be understood in a very concrete sense. It is hardly to be differentiated fr. δύναμις (θεοῦ) or fr. γνῶσις or δόξα (q.v. 1b. On this subj. s. Wetter [5 below] p. 94ff; esp. 130ff; pap in the GLumbroso Festschr. 1925, 212ff: χάρις, δύναμις, πνεῦμα w. essentially the same mng.; PGM 4, 2438; 3165; Herm. Wr. 1, 32; Just., D. 87, 5 ἀπὸ χάριτος τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ πνεύματος). οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ ἀλλʼ ἐν χάριτι θεοῦ 2 Cor 1:12. οὐκ ἐγὼ δὲ ἀλλὰ ἡ χάρις τοῦ θεοῦ σὺν ἐμοί 1 Cor 15:10c. αὐξάνετε ἐν χάριτι καὶ γνώσει τοῦ κυρίου 2 Pt 3:18; cp. 1 Cl 55:3; B 1:2 (τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάρις). Stephen is said to be πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως Ac 6:8. Divine power fills the Christian confessor or martyr w. a radiant glow MPol 12:1 (but s. 1 above). As the typical quality of the age to come, contrasted w. the κόσμος D 10:6.

⑤ response to generosity or beneficence, thanks, gratitude (a fundamental component in the Gr-Rom. reciprocity system; exx. fr. later times: Diod S 11, 71, 4 [χάριτες=proofs of gratitude]; Appian, Syr. 3, 12; 13. Cp. Wetter [below] p. 206f) χάριν ἔχειν τινί be grateful to someone (Eur., Hec. 767; X., An. 2, 5, 14; Pla., Phlb. 54d; Ath. 2, 1; PLips 104, 14 [I B.C.] χάριν σοι ἔχω) foll. by ὅτι (Epict. 3, 5, 10; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 270; 2, 49) Lk 17:9 (ERiggenbach, NKZ 34, 1923, 439–43); mostly of gratitude to God or Christ; χάρις in our lit. as a whole, in the sense gratitude, refers to appropriate respone to the Deity for benefits conferred (Hom., Pind., Thu. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Jos., Ant. 7, 208) χάριν ἔχω τῷ θεῷ (POxy 113, 13 [II A.D.] χάριν ἔχω θεοῖς πᾶσιν.—Epict. 4, 7, 9) 2 Ti 1:3; foll. by ὅτι because 1 Ti 1:12 (Herm. Wr. 6, 4 κἀγὼ χάριν ἔχω τῷ θεῷ …, ὅτι; Jos., Ant. 4, 316); χάριν ἔχειν ἐπί τινι be grateful for someth. Phlm 7 v.l. (to humans). ἔχωμεν χάριν let us be thankful (to God) Hb 12:28 (the reason for it is given by the preceding ptc. παραλαμβάνοντες). Elliptically (B-D-F §128, 6; cp. Rob. 1201f) χάρις (ἔστω) τῷ θεῷ (X., Oec. 8, 16 πολλὴ χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς; Epict. 4, 4, 7 χάρις τῷ θεῳ; BGU 843, 6 [I/II A.D.] χάρις τοῖς θεοῖς al. in pap since III B.C..—Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 309) Ro 7:25; MPol 3:1. Foll. by ὅτι (X., An. 3, 3, 14 τοῖς θεοῖς χάρις ὅτι; PFay 124, 16 τοῖς θεοῖς ἐστιν χάρις ὅτι; Epict. 4, 5, 9) Ro 6:17. Foll. by ἐπί τινι for someth. (UPZ 108, 30 [99 B.C.]) 2 Cor 9:15. The reason for the thanks is given in the ptc. agreeing w. τῷ θεῷ 2:14; 8:16; 1 Cor 15:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 6, 145; Philo, Somn. 2, 213). Thankfulness (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51 πρός τινα=toward someone) χάριτι in thankfulness 10:30. So prob. also ἐν τῇ χάριτι in a thankful spirit Col 3:16 (Dibelius, Hdb. ad loc.). πλησθῆναι χαρᾶς καὶ χάριτος AcPl Ha 8, 7. S. εὐχαριστέω, end. Also PSchubert, Form and Function of the Pauline Thanksgivings ’39.—OLoew, Χάρις, diss., Marburg 1908; GWetter, Charis 1913; AvHarnack, Sanftmut, Huld u. Demut in der alten Kirche: JKaftan Festschr. 1920, 113ff; NBonwetsch, Zur Geschichte des Begriffs Gnade in der alten Kirche: Harnack Festgabe 1921, 93–101; EBurton, Gal ICC 1921, 423f; WWhitley, The Doctrine of Grace ’32; JMoffatt, Grace in the NT ’31; RWinkler, D. Gnade im NT: ZST 10, ’33, 642–80; RHomann, D. Gnade in d. Syn. Ev.: ibid. 328–48; JWobbe, D. Charisgedanke b. Pls ’32; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 283–310 (Paul); HBoers, Ἀγάπη and Χάρις in Paul’s Thought: CBQ 59, ’97, 693–713; on 2 Cor 8: FDanker, Augsburg Comm. 2 Cor, 116–34; PRousselot, La Grâce d’après St. Jean et d’après St. Paul: SR 18, 1928, 87–108, Christent. u. Wissensch. 8, ’32, 402–30; JMontgomery, Hebrew Hesed and Gk. Charis: HTR 32, ’39, 97–102; Dodd 61f; TTorrance, The Doctrine of Grace in the Apost. Fathers, ’48; JRenié, Studia Anselmiana 27f, ’51, 340–50; CRSmith, The Bible Doctrine of Grace, ’56; EFlack, The Concept of Grace in Bibl. Thought: Bibl. Studies in Memory of HAlleman, ed. Myers, ’60, 137–54; DDoughty, NTS 19, ’73, 163–80.—B. 1166. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

ἐκ, before vowels ἐξ, prep. w. gen. (Hom.+; s. lit. s.v. ἀνά and εἰς beg.)

① marker denoting separation, from, out of, away from

ⓐ w. the place or thing fr. which separation takes place. Hence esp. w. verbs of motion ἀναβαίνω, ἀναλύω, ἀνίστημι, ἐγείρομαι, εἰσέρχομαι, ἐκβάλλω, ἐκπορεύομαι, ἐξέρχομαι, ἔρχομαι, ἥκω, καταβαίνω, μεταβαίνω, ῥύομαι, συνάγω, φεύγω; s. these entries. καλεῖν ἐξ Αἰγύπτου Mt 2:15 (Hos 11:1); ἐκ σκότους 1 Pt 2:9. αἴρειν ἐκ τ. κόσμου J 17:15. ἐξαλείφειν ἐκ τῆς βίβλου Rv 3:5 (Ex 32:32f; Ps 68:29). ἀποκυλίειν τ. λίθον ἐκ τ. θύρας Mk 16:3; cp. J 20:1; Rv 6:14; σῴζειν ἐκ γῆς Αἰγ. Jd 5; διασῴζειν ἐκ τ. θαλάσσης Ac 28:4. παραγίνεσθαι ἐξ ὁδοῦ arrive on a journey (lit. from, i.e. interrupting a journey) Lk 11:6; fig. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐξ ὁδοῦ bring back fr. the way Js 5:20; cp. 2 Pt 2:21. ἐκ τῆς χειρός τινος (Hebraistically מִיַּד פּ׳, oft. LXX; s. B-D-F §217, 2; Rob. 649) from someone’s power ἐξέρχεσθαι J 10:39; ἁρπάζειν 10:28f (cp. Plut., Ages. 615 [34, 6] ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν τῶν Ἐπαμινώνδου τ. πόλιν ἐξαρπάσας; JosAs 12:8 ἅρπασόν με ἐκ χειρὸς τοῦ ἐχθροῦ); ἐξαιρεῖσθαι Ac 12:11 (cp. Aeschin. 3, 256 ἐκ τ. χειρῶν ἐξελέσθαι τῶν Φιλίππου; Sir 4:9; Bar 4:18, 21 al.); ῥύεσθαι Lk 1:74; cp. vs. 71 (Ps 105:10; Wsd 2:18; JosAs 12:10); εἰρυσταί σε κύριος ἐκ χειρὸς ἀνόμου AcPlCor 1:8 (cp. ἐκ τούτων ἄπαντων PsSol 13:4).—After πίνειν, of the object fr. which one drinks (X., Cyr. 5, 3, 3): ἐκ τ. ποτηρίου Mt 26:27; Mk 14:23; 1 Cor 11:28; cp. 10:4; J 4:12. Sim. φαγεῖν ἐκ τ. θυσιαστηρίου Hb 13:10.

ⓑ w. a group or company fr. which separation or dissociation takes place (Hyperid. 6, 17 and Lucian, Cyn. 13 ἐξ ἀνθρώπων) ἐξολεθρεύειν ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ Ac 3:23 (Ex 30:33; Lev 23:29). συμβιβάζειν ἐκ τ. ὄχλου 19:33; ἐκλέγειν ἐκ τ. κόσμου J 15:19; cp. Mt 13:41, 47; Ac 1:24; 15:22; Ro 9:24. For ἐκ freq. ἐκ μέσου Mt 13:49; Ac 17:33; 23:10; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:17 (cp. Ex 31:14).—ἀνιστάναι τινὰ ἔκ τινων Ac 3:22 (Dt 18:15); ἐκ νεκρῶν 17:31. ἐγείρειν τινὰ ἐκ νεκρῶν J 12:1, 9, 17; Ac 3:15; 4:10; 13:30; Hb 11:19; AcPlCor 2:6; ἀνίστασθαι ἐκ νεκρῶν Ac 10:41; 17:3; ἀνάστασις ἐκ νεκρ. Lk 20:35; 1 Pt 1:3; cp. Ro 10:7. Also s. ἠρεμέω.

ⓒ of situations and circumstances out of which someone is brought, from: ἐξαγοράζειν ἔκ τινος redeem fr. someth. Gal 3:13; also λυτροῦν (cp. Sir 51:2) 1 Pt 1:18; σῴζειν ἔκ τινος save fr. someth. J 12:27; Hb 5:7; Js 5:20 (Od. 4, 753; MLetronne, Recueil des Inscr. 1842/8, 190; 198 σωθεὶς ἐκ; SIG 1130, 1f; UPZ 60:6f [s. διασῴζω]; PVat A, 7 [168 B.C.]=Witkowski 36, 7 διασεσῶσθαι ἐκ μεγάλων κινδύνων; Sir 51:11; EpJer 49; JosAs 4:8 ἐκ τοῦ … λιμοῦ); ἐξαιρεῖσθαι Ac 7:10 (cp. Wsd 10:1; Sir 29:12). τηρεῖν ἔκ τινος keep from someth. Rv 3:10; μεταβαίνειν ἔκ τινος εἴς τι J 5:24; 1J 3:14; μετανοεῖν ἔκ τινος repent and turn away fr. someth. Rv 2:21f; 9:20f; 16:11. ἀναπαύεσθαι ἐκ τ. κόπων rest fr. one’s labors 14:13. ἐγείρεσθαι ἐξ ὕπνου wake fr. sleep (Epict. 2, 20, 15; Sir 22:9; cp. ParJer 5:2 οὐκ ἐξυπνίσθη ἐκ τοῦ ὕπνου αὐτοῦ) Ro 13:11. ζωὴ ἐκ νεκρῶν 11:15. ζῶντες ἐκ νεκρῶν people who have risen fr. death to life 6:13 (cp. Soph., Oed. R. 454; X., An. 7, 7, 28; Demosth. 18, 131 ἐλεύθερος ἐκ δούλου καὶ πλούσιος ἐκ πτωχοῦ γεγονώς; Palaeph. 3, 2). S. ἀνάστασις 2b.

ⓓ of pers. and things with whom a connection is severed or is to remain severed: τηρεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ keep them fr. the evil one J 17:15; cp. Ac 15:29. Pregnant constr.: ἀνανήφειν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 2 Ti 2:26. νικᾶν ἔκ τινος free oneself from … by victory Rv 15:2 (for possible Latinism s. reff. to Livy and Velleius Paterculus in OLD s.v. ‘victoria’; but s. also RCharles, ICC Rv II, 33). ἐλεύθερος ἐκ 1 Cor 9:19 (cp. Eur., Herc. Fur. 1010 ἐλευθεροῦντες ἐκ δρασμῶν πόδα ‘freeing our feet from flight’ [=we recovered from our flight]). καθαρός εἰμι ἐγὼ ἐξ αὐτῆς I practiced abstinence with her GJs 15:4.

② marker denoting the direction fr. which someth. comes, from καταβαίνειν ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους (Il. 13, 17; X., An. 7, 4, 12; Ex 19:14; 32:1 al.; JosAs 4:1 ἐκ τοῦ ὑπερῴου) Mt 17:9. θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν οὐ μὴ ἀπόληται Lk 21:18. ἐκπίπτειν ἐκ τ. χειρῶν Ac 12:7. διδάσκειν ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου Lk 5:3. ἐκ τῆς βάτου χρηματισμοῦ διδομένου 1 Cl 17:5 (cp. Just., A I, 62:3). ἐκ τῆς πρύμνης ῥίψαντες τὰς ἀγκύρας Ac 27:29. κρέμασθαι ἔκ τινος (Hom. et al.; 1 Macc 1:61; 2 Macc 6:10; Jos., Ant. 14, 107) 28:4. ἐκ ῥιζῶν to (lit. from) its roots (Job 28:9; 31:12) Mk 11:20; B 12:9.—Since the Greek feeling concerning the relation betw. things in this case differed fr. ours, ἐκ could answer the question ‘where?’ (cp. Soph., Phil. 20; Synes., Ep. 131 p. 267a ἐκ τῆς ἑτέρας μερίδος=on the other side; BGU 975, 11; 15 [45 A.D.]; PGM 36, 239; LXX; JosAs 16:12 εἱστήκει … ἐξ εὐωνύμων; 22:7) ἐκ δεξιῶν at (on) the right (δεξιός 1b) Mt 20:21, 23; 22:44 (Ps 109:1); 25:33; Lk 1:11; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8), 34 (Ps 109:1); 7:55f; B 11:10. ἐξ ἐναντίας opposite Mk 15:39 (Hdt. 8, 6, 2; Thu. 4, 33, 1; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 461, 6; Sir 37:9; Wsd 4:20 al.); ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας the opponent (Sext. Emp., Adv. Phys. 1, 66 [=Adv. Math. 9, 66]; 2, 69 [=Adv. Math. 10, 69], Adv. Eth. 1, 25; Bias in Diog. L. 1, 84) Tit 2:8.—ἐκ τοῦ κατωτάτου ᾅδου … προσευχομένου Ἰωνᾶ AcPlCor 2:30.

③ marker denoting origin, cause, motive, reason, from, of

ⓐ in expr. which have to do w. begetting and birth from, of, by: ἐκ introduces the role of the male (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 9 ἐκ θεοῦ ἔστι; JosAs 21:8 συνέλαβεν Ἀσενὲθ ἐκ τοῦ Ἰωσήφ; Tat. 33, 3 συλλαμβάνουσιν ἐκ φθορέως; Ath. 22, 4 ἐκ τοῦ Κρόνου; SIG 1163, 3; 1169, 63; OGI 383, 3; 5 [I B.C.]) ἐν γαστρὶ ἔχειν ἔκ τινος Mt 1:18. κοίτην ἔχειν ἔκ τινος Ro 9:10; also of the female (SIG 1160, 3; PEleph 1, 9 [311/10 B.C.] τεκνοποιεῖσθαι ἐξ ἄλλης γυναικός; PFay 28, 9 γεννᾶσθαι ἐκ; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 14 Jac.; Jos., Ant. 1, 191; Ath. 20, 3 ἐξ ἧς παῖς Διόνυσος αὐτῷ) γεννᾶν τινα ἐκ beget someone by (a woman; s. γεννάω 1a) Mt 1:3, 5, etc. ἐκ Μαρίας ἐγεννῄθη AcPlCor 1:14; 2:5; γίνεσθαι ἐκ γυναικός (Jos., Ant. 11, 152; Ar. 9, 7) Gal 4:4; cp. vs. 22f.—γεννᾶσθαι ἐξ αἱμάτων κτλ. J 1:13; ἐκ τ. σαρκός 3:6; ἐκ πορνείας 8:41. ἐγείρειν τινὶ τέκνα ἐκ Mt 3:9; Lk 3:8. (τὶς) ἐκ καρποῦ τ. ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ Ac 2:30 (Ps 131:11). γεννᾶσθαι ἐκ τ. θεοῦ J 1:13; 1J 3:9; 4:7; 5:1, 4, 18 (Just., A I, 22, 2); ἐκ τ. πνεύματος J 3:6 (opp. ἐκ τ. σαρκός). εἶναι ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ (Menand., Sam. 602 S. [257 Kö.]) J 8:47; 1J 4:4, 6; 5:19; opp. εἶναι ἐκ τ. διαβόλου J 8:44; 1J 3:8 (cp. OGI 90, 10 of Ptolemaeus Epiphanes ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ κ. θεᾶς).

ⓑ to denote origin as to family, race, city, people, district, etc.: ἐκ Ναζαρέτ J 1:46. ἐκ πόλεως vs. 44. ἐξ οἴκου Lk 1:27; 2:4. ἐκ γένους (Jos., Ant. 11, 136) Phil 3:5; Ac 4:6. ἐκ φυλῆς (Jos., Ant. 6, 45; 49; PTebt I, 26, 15) Lk 2:36; Ac 13:21; 15:23; Ro 11:1. Ἑβρ. ἐξ Ἑβραίων a Hebrew, the son of Hebrews Phil 3:5 (Goodsp., Probs., 175f; on the connotation of ancestral ἀρετή Phil 3:5 cp. New Docs VII 233, no. 10, 5). ἐκ σπέρματός τινος J 7:42; Ro 1:3; 11:1. ἐξ ἐθνῶν Ac 15:23; cp. Gal 2:15. Cp. Lk 23:7; Ac 23:34. ἐκ τ. γῆς J 3:31. For this ἐκ τῶν κάτω J 8:23 (opp. ἐκ τ. ἄνω). ἐκ (τούτου) τ. κόσμου 15:19ab; 17:14; 1J 2:16; 4:5. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30.—To express a part of the whole, subst.: οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ the Israelites Ro 9:6. οἱ ἐξ ἐριθείας selfish, factious people 2:8. οἱ ἐκ νόμου partisans of the law 4:14; cp. vs. 16. οἱ ἐκ πίστεως those who have faith Gal 3:7, 9; cp. the sg. Ro 3:26; 4:16. οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς the circumcision party Ac 11:2; Ro 4:12; Gal 2:12. οἱ ἐκ τῆς περιτομῆς Tit 1:10. For this οἱ ὄντες ἐκ περιτομῆς Col 4:11. οἱ ἐκ τ. συναγωγῆς members of the synagogue Ac 6:9. οἱ ἐκ τῶν Ἀριστοβούλου Ro 16:10f. οἱ ἐκ τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας Phil 4:22 (s. Καῖσαρ and οἰκία 3). In these cases the idea of belonging, the partisan use, often completely overshadows that of origin; cp. Dg 6:3.

ⓒ to denote derivation (Maximus Tyr. 13, 3f φῶς ἐκ πυρός; Ath. 18:3 γένεσιν … ἐξ ὕδατος) καπνὸς ἐκ τ. δόξης τ. θεοῦ Rv 15:8 (cp. EpJer 20 καπνὸς ἐκ τ. οἰκίας). ἡ σωτηρία ἐκ τ. Ἰουδαίων ἐστίν J 4:22. εἶναι ἔκ τινος come, derive from someone or someth. (Jos., Ant. 7, 209) Mt 5:37; J 7:17, 22; 1J 2:16, 21; εἶναι is oft. to be supplied Ro 2:29; 11:36; 1 Cor 8:6 ( Plut., Mor. 1001c); 11:12; 2 Cor 4:7; Gal 5:8. ἔργα ἐκ τοῦ πατρός J 10:32. οἰκοδομὴ ἐκ θεοῦ 2 Cor 5:1; χάρισμα 1 Cor 7:7; δικαιοσύνη Phil 3:9. φωνὴ ἐκ τ. στόματος αὐτοῦ Ac 22:14. Here belongs the constr. w. ἐκ for the subj. gen., as in ἡ ἐξ ὑμῶν (v.l.) ἀγάπη 2 Cor 8:7; ὁ ἐξ ὑμῶν ζῆλος 9:2 v.l.; Rv 2:9 (cp. Vett. Val. 51, 16; CIG II 3459, 11 τῇ ἐξ ἑαυτῆς κοσμιότητι; pap. [Rossberg 14f]; 1 Macc 11:33 χάριν τῆς ἐξ αὐτῶν εὐνοίας; 2 Macc 6:26). ἐγένετο ζήτησις ἐκ τ. μαθητῶν Ἰωάννου there arose a discussion on the part of John’s disciples J 3:25 (Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4 ζήτησις πολλὴ ἐκ πάντων ἐγένετο; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 24 §91 σφαγή τις ἐκ τῶν στρατιωτῶν ἐγένετο).

ⓓ of the effective cause by, because of (cp. the ‘perfectivizing’ force of ἐκ and other prepositions in compounds, e.g. Mt 4:7; Mk 9:15. B-D-F §318, 5)

α. personal in nature, referring to originator (X., An. 1, 1, 6; Diod S 19, 1, 4 [saying of Solon]; Arrian, Anab. 3, 1, 2; 4, 13, 6 of an inspired woman κατεχομένη ἐκ τοῦ θείου; Achilles Tat. 5, 27, 2; SibOr 3, 395; Just.: A I, 12, 5 ἐκ δαιμόνων φαύλων … καὶ ταῦτα … ἐνεργεῖσθαι, also D. 18, 3; Nicetas Eugen. 7, 85 H. ἐκ θεῶν σεσωσμένη; Ps.-Clem., Hom. p. 7, 19 Lag. τὸν ἐκ θεοῦ σοι ἀποδιδόμενον μισθόν): ὠφελεῖσθαι ἔκ τινος Mt 15:5; Mk 7:11. ζημιοῦσθαι 2 Cor 7:9. λυπεῖσθαι 2:2. εὐχαριστεῖσθαι 1:11. ἀδικεῖσθαι Rv 2:11. ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλάλησα J 12:49 (cp. Soph., El. 344 οὐδὲν ἐξ σαυτῆς λέγεις).

β. impersonal in nature (Arrian, Anab. 3, 21, 10 ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐκ τ. τραυμάτων; 6, 25, 4; JosAs 29:8 ἐκ τοῦ τραύματος τοῦ λίθου; POxy 486, 32 τὰ ἐμὰ ἐκ τ. ἀναβάσεως τ. Νίλου ἀπολωλέναι): ἀποθανεῖν ἐκ τ. ὑδάτων Rv 8:11. πυροῦσθαι 3:18. σκοτοῦσθαι 9:2. φωτίζεσθαι 18:1. κεκοπιακὼς ἐκ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας J 4:6 (Aelian, VH 3, 23 ἐκ τοῦ πότου ἐκάθευδεν). ἔκαμον ἐκ τῆς ὁδοῦ GJs 15:1.

ⓔ of the reason which is a presupposition for someth.: by reason of, as a result of, because of (X., An. 2, 5, 5; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 42 §185 ἐκ προδοσίας; POxy 486, 28f ἐκ τῆς ἐπιστολῆς; Just., A I, 68, 3 ἐξ ἐπιστολῆς; numerous examples in Mayser II/2 p. 388; Philo, De Jos. 184 ἐκ διαβολῆς; Jos., Vi. 430; JosAs 11 παραλελυμένη … ἐκ τῆς πολλῆς ταπεινώσεως; Ar. 8, 6 ἐκ τούτων … τῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων τῆς πλάνης; Just., A I, 4, 1 ἐκ τοῦ … ὀνόματος; also inf.: 33, 2 ἵνα … ἐκ τοῦ προειρῆσθαι πιστευθῇ 68, 3 al.): δικαιοῦσθαι ἔκ τινος Ro 4:2; Gal 2:16; 3:24; cp. Ro 3:20, 30 (cp. εἴ τις ἐκ γένους [δίκαι]ος=has the right of citizenship by descent [i.e. has the law on his side]: letter of MAurelius 34, ZPE 8, ’71, 170); οὐκ … ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ ἐστιν ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ he does not live because of his possessions Lk 12:15. ἐκ ταύτης τ. ἐργασίας Ac 19:25. ἐξ ἔργων λαβεῖν τὸ πνεῦμα Gal 3:2, 5; cp. Ro 11:6. ἐξ ἀναστάσεως λαβεῖν τ. νεκρούς Hb 11:35. ἐσταυρώθη ἐξ ἀσθενείας 2 Cor 13:4. τὸ ἐξ ὑμῶν as far as it depends on you Ro 12:18.—ἐκ τοῦ πόνου in anguish Rv 16:10; cp. vs. 11; 8:13.—ἐκ τούτου for this reason, therefore (SIG 1168, 47; 1169, 18; 44; 62f; BGU 423, 17=Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 480, 17) J 6:66; 19:12.

ⓕ Sim. ἐκ can introduce the means which one uses for a definite purpose, with, by means of (Polyaenus 3, 9, 62 ἐξ ἱμάντος=by means of a thong) ἐκ τοῦ μαμωνᾶ Lk 16:9 (X., An. 6, 4, 9; PTebt 5, 80 [118 B.C.] ἐκ τ. ἱερῶν προσόδων; ParJer 1:7 [of Jerusalem] ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν σου ἀφανισθήτω; Jos., Vi. 142 ἐκ τ. χρημάτων); cp. 8:3.

ⓖ of the source, fr. which someth. flows or comes:

α. λαλεῖν ἐκ τ. ἰδίων J 8:44. ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύματος τ. καρδίας Mt 12:34. τὰ ἐκ τ. ἱεροῦ the food from the temple 1 Cor 9:13. ἐκ τ. εὐαγγελίου ζῆν get one’s living by proclaiming the gospel vs. 14.

β. information, insight, etc. (X., An. 7, 7, 43 ἐκ τῶν ἔργων κατέμαθες; Just., A I, 28, 1 ἐκ τῶν ἡμετέρων συγγραμμάτων … μαθεῖν 34, 2 al.) κατηχεῖσθαι ἐκ Ro 2:18. ἀκούειν ἐκ J 12:34. γινώσκειν Mt 12:33; Lk 6:44; 1J 3:24; 4:6. ἐποπτεύειν 1 Pt 2:12. δεικνύναι Js 2:18 (cp. ἀποδεικνύναι Just., D. 33, 1).

γ. of the inner life, etc., fr. which someth. proceeds (since Il. 9, 486): ἐκ καρδίας Ro 6:17; 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. (cp. Theocr. 29, 4; M. Ant. 3, 3). ἐκ ψυχῆς Eph 6:6; Col 3:23 (X., An. 7, 7, 43, Oec. 10, 4; Jos., Ant. 17, 177; 1 Macc 8:27). ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Ti 1:5; 2 Ti 2:22; 1 Pt 1:22. ἐξ ὅλης τ. καρδίας σου καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τ. ψυχῆς σου καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τ. διανοίας σου καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τ. ἰσχύος σου Mk 12:30; cp. Lk 10:27 (Dt 6:5; cp. Wsd 8:21; 4 Macc 7:18; Epict. 2, 23, 42 ἐξ ὅλης ψυχῆς). ἐκ πίστεως Ro 14:23; cp. 2 Cor 2:17. Also of circumstances which accompany an action without necessarily being the source of it: γράφειν ἐκ πολλῆς θλίψεως write out of great affliction 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 1:17.

ⓗ of the material out of which someth. is made (Hdt. 1, 194; Pla., Rep. 10, 616c; OGI 194, 28 [42 B.C.] a statue ἐκ σκληροῦ λίθου; PMagd 42, 5 [221 B.C.]=PEnteux 83, 5; POxy 707, 28; PGM 13, 659; Wsd 15:8; 1 Macc 10:11; Jdth 1:2; En 99:13; JosAs 3:9; Just., A I, 59, 1) of, from στέφανος ἐξ ἀκανθῶν Mt 27:29; J 19:2; cp. 2:15; 9:6; Ro 9:21; 1 Cor 15:47; Rv 18:12; 21:21; perh. also 1 Cor 11:12 ἡ γυνὴ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνδρός.

ⓘ of the underlying rule or principle according to, in accordance with (Hdt., Pla. et al. [Kühner-G. I 461g], also OGI 48, 12 [III B.C.] ἐκ τ. νόμων; PEleph 1, 12 [312/11 B.C.] ἐκ δίκης; PPetr III, 26, 9 ἐκ κρίσεως; LXX, e.g. 1 Macc 8:30; Jos., Ant. 6, 296 ἐκ κυνικῆς ἀσκήσεως πεποιημένος τὸν βίον) ἐκ τ. λόγων Mt 12:37 (cp. Wsd 2:20). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε by what you have said Lk 19:22 (cp. Sus 61 Theod.; also X., Cyr. 2, 2, 21 ἐκ τ. ἔργων κρίνεσθαι). ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων on the basis of things written Rv 20:12. ἐκ τ. καλοῦντος Ro 9:12. ἐκ τ. ἔχειν in accordance w. your ability 2 Cor 8:11. ἐξ ἰσότητος on the basis of equality vs. 13.

④ marker used in periphrasis, from, of

ⓐ for the partitive gen. (B-D-F §164, 1 and 2; 169; Rob. 599; 1379).

α. after words denoting number εἷς, μία, ἕν (Hdt. 2, 46, 2 ἐκ τούτων εἷς; POxy 117, 14ff [II/III A.D.] δύο … ἐξ ὧν … ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν; Tob 12:15 BA; Sir 32:1; Jos., Bell. 7, 47; JosAs 20:2 ἐκ τῶν παρθένων μία Just., D. 126, 4) Mt 10:29; 18:12; 22:35; 27:48; Mk 9:17 al.; εἷς τις J 11:49; δύο Mk 16:12; Lk 24:13; J 1:35; 21:2. πέντε Mt 25:2. πολλοί (1 Macc 5:26; 9:69) J 6:60, 66; 7:31; 11:19, 45. οἱ πλείονες 1 Cor 15:6. οὐδείς (Epict. 1, 29, 37; 1 Macc 5:54; 4 Macc 14:4; Ar. 13, 6; Just., D. 16, 2) J 7:19; 16:5. χιλιάδες ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς Rv 7:4.

β. after the indef. pron. (Plut., Galba 1065 [27, 2]; Herodian 5, 3, 9; 3 Macc 2:30; Jos., Vi. 279) Lk 11:15; J 6:64; 7:25, 44, 48; 9:16; 11:37, 46 al. Also after the interrog. pron. Mt 6:27; 21:31; Lk 11:5; 12:25; 14:28 al.

γ. the partitive w. ἐκ as subj. (2 Km 11:17) εἶπαν ἐκ τ. μαθητῶν αὐτοῦ J 16:17.—Rv 11:9. As obj., pl. Mt 23:34; Lk 11:49; 21:16; 2J 4 (cp. Sir 33:12; Jdth 7:18; 10:17 al.).

δ. used w. εἶναι belong to someone or someth. (Jos., Ant. 12, 399) καὶ σὺ ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ you also belong to them Mt 26:73; cp. Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58; J 7:50; 10:26; Ac 21:8; cp. 2 Cl 18:1. οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τ. σώματος I do not belong to the body 1 Cor 12:15f; cp. 2 Cl 14:1.

ε. after verbs of supplying, receiving, consuming: ἐσθίειν ἔκ τινος (Tob 1:10; Sir 11:19; Jdth 12:2; JosAs 16:8) 1 Cor 9:7; 11:28; J 6:26, 50f; Rv 2:7. πίνειν Mt 26:29; Mk 14:25; J 4:13f; Rv 14:10; χορτάζειν ἔκ τινος gorge w. someth. 19:21 (s. ζ below); μετέχειν 1 Cor 10:17; λαμβάνειν (1 Esdr 6:31; Wsd 15:8) J 1:16; Rv 18:4; Hs 9, 24, 4. τὸ βρέφος … ἔλαβε μασθὸν ἐκ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ the child took its mother’s breast GJs 19:2; διδόναι (Tob 4:16; Ezk 16:17) Mt 25:8; 1J 4:13. διαδιδόναι (Tob 4:16 A) J 6:11.

ζ. after verbs of filling: ἐπληρώθη ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς was filled w. the fragrance J 12:3 cp. Rv 8:5. χορτασθῆναι ἔκ τινος to be satisfied to the full w. someth. Lk 15:16. γέμειν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς be full of greed Mt 23:25.

ⓑ in periphrasis for the gen. of price or value for (Palaeph. 45; PFay 111, 16 [95/96 A.D.]; 119, 5 [c. 100 A.D.]; 131, 5; PLond II, 277, 9 p. 217 [23 A.D.]; BGU III, 916, 19 [I A.D.]; PAmh II, 133, 19 [II A.D.]; Jos., Ant. 14, 34; B-D-F §179) ἀγοράζειν τι ἔκ τινος Mt 27:7 (POxy 745, 2 [c. 1 A.D.] τ. οἶνον ἠγόρασας ἐκ δραχμῶν ἕξ; EpJer 24); cp. Ac 1:18; Mt 20:2.

⑤ marker denoting temporal sequence, from

ⓐ of the time when someth. begins from, from … on, for, etc. ἐκ κοιλίας μητρός from birth (Ps 21:11; 70:6; Is 49:1) Mt 19:12 al.; also ἐκ γενετῆς J 9:1 (since Il. 24, 535; Od. 18, 6; s. also γενετή). ἐκ νεότητος (since Il. 14, 86; Ps 70:5; Sir 7:23; Wsd 8:2; 1 Macc 2:66; JosAs 17:4) Mk 10:20; Lk 18:21. ἐξ ἱκανῶν χρόνων for a long time 23:8. ἐκ πολλῶν χρόνων a long time before 1 Cl 42:5 (cp. Epict. 2, 16, 17 ἐκ πολλοῦ χρόνου. Cp. ἐκ πολλοῦ Thu. 1, 68, 3; 2, 88, 2; ἐξ ὀλίγων ἡμερῶν Lysias, Epitaph. 1). ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων Ac 15:21 (cp. X., Hell. 6, 1, 4 ἐκ πάντων προγόνων). ἐκ τ. αἰῶνος since the world began J 9:32 (cp. ἐξ αἰῶνος Sext. Emp., Adv. Math. 9, 76; Diod S 4, 83, 3; Aelian, VH 6, 13; 12, 64; OGI 669, 61; Sir 1:4; 1 Esdr 2:17, 21; Jos., Bell. 5, 442). ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτώ for eight years Ac 9:33; cp. 24:10. ἐξ ἀρχῆς (PTebt 40, 20 [117 B.C.]; Sir 15:14; 39:32; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 225; Ath. 8, 1) J 6:64. ἐκ παιδιόθεν fr. childhood Mk 9:21 (s. παιδιόθεν. Just., A I, 15, 6 ἐκ παίδων. On the use of ἐκ w. an adv. cp. ἐκ τότε POxy 486 [II A.D.]; ἐκ πρωίθεν 1 Macc 10:80).

ⓑ of temporal sequence

α. ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας day after day 2 Pt 2:8; 2 Cl 11:2 (cp. Ps.-Eur., Rhes. 445; Henioch. Com. 5:13 K.; Theocr. 18, 35; Gen 39:10; Num 30:15; Sir 5:7; Esth 3:7; En 98:8; 103:10).

β. ἐκ δευτέρου for the second time, again, s. δεύτερος 2. ἐκ τρίτου Mt 26:44 (ParJer 7:8; cp. PHolm 1, 32 ἐκ τετάρτου).

⑥ various uses and units

ⓐ blending of constructions, cp. Rob. 599f: ἐκ for ἐν (Hdt., Thu. et al., s. Kühner-G. I 546f; LXX, e.g. Sus 26 Theod.; 1 Macc 11:41; 13:21; Jdth 15:5) ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ δώσει Lk 11:13. μὴ καταβάτω ἆραι τὰ ἐκ τῆς οἰκίας αὐτοῦ Mt 24:17. τὴν ἐκ Λαοδικείας (ἐπιστολὴν) ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀναγνῶτε Col 4:16.

ⓑ like the OT use of מִן: ἔκρινεν ὁ θεὸς τὸ κρίμα ὑμῶν ἐξ αὐτῆς God has pronounced judgment for you against her Rv 18:20 (cp. Ps 118:84; Is 1:24; En 100:4; 104:3). ἐξεδίκησεν τὸ αἷμα τ. δούλων αὐτοῦ ἐκ χειρὸς αὐτῆς 19:2, cp. 6:10 (both 4 Km 9:7).

ⓒ adv. expressions (Just., A I, 2, 1 ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου ‘in every way’): ἐξ ἀνάγκης (ἀνάγκη 1). ἐκ συμφώνου by mutual consent (BGU 446, 13=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 257, 13; CPR I, 11, 14 al. in pap; cp. Dssm., NB 82f [BS 225]) 1 Cor 7:5. ἐκ λύπης reluctantly 2 Cor 9:7. ἐκ περισσοῦ extremely (Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 64; Lucian, Pro Merc. Cond. 13; Da 3:22 Theod.; Galen, CMG V/10/2/2 p. 284, 17 [-ττ]) Mk 6:51; 1 Th 5:13 v.l.; ἐκ μέτρου by measure = sparingly J 3:34. ἐκ μέρους (Galen, CMG V/10/2/2 p. 83, 24) part by part = as far as the parts are concerned, individually 1 Cor 12:27 (distributive; cp. PHolm 1, 7 ἐκ δραχμῶν Ϛ´=6 dr. each); mostly in contrast to ‘complete’, only in part 13:9 (BGU 538, 35; 574, 10; 887, 6; 17 al. in pap; EpArist 102). ἐξ ὀνόματος individually, personally, by name IEph 20:2; IPol 4:2; 8:2.

ⓓ ἐκ … εἰς w. the same word repeated gives it special emphasis (Plut., Galba 1058 [14, 2] ἐκ προδοσίας εἰς προδοσίαν; Ps 83:8) ἐκ πίστεως εἰς πίστιν Ro 1:17.—2 Cor 2:16 (twice).—The result and goal are thus indicated Ro 11:36; 1 Cor 8:6; Col 1:16. AFridrichsen, ConNeot 12, ’48, 54.—DELG s.v. ἐξ. M-M.

κρίνω (s. κρίμα; Hom.+) fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρίκει (on the lack of augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; W-S. §12, 4; Mlt-H. 190; ἐκεκρίκει Just., D. 102, 2). Pass.: impf. ἐκρινόμην; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην; pf. κέκριμαι. Primary mng.: ‘to set apart so as to distinguish, separate’, then by transference

① to make a selection, select, prefer (Aeschyl., Suppl. 39 τὶ; Pla., Rep. 3, 399e κρίνειν τινὰ πρό τινος ‘prefer someone to someone’, cp. Phlb. 57e; Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 3 κ. τί τινι=select someth. because of someth. [a place because of its size]; κ. τὸ πρακτέον καὶ μὴ πρακτέον Did., Gen. 27, 3) ὸ̔ς μὲν γὰρ κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν the one prefers one day to another Ro 14:5a. In the other half of the sentence ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, κ. prob. has the sense recognize, approve (X., Hell. 1, 7, 34 ἔκριναν τὴν τῆς βουλῆς γνώμην) the other holds every day in esteem vs. 5b. Closely associated is mng.

② to pass judgment upon (and thereby seek to influence) the lives and actions of other people

ⓐ judge, pass judgment upon, express an opinion about Mt 7:1a, 2a; Lk 6:37a; 1 Cl 13:2; Pol 2:3 (Sextus 183 ὁ κρίνων ἄνθρωπον κρίνεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ). κ. δικαίως D 4:3; B 19:11. κ. κατʼ ὄψιν by the outward appearance J 7:24a. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 8:15. τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κ. pass a right judgment 7:24b (on the expr. cp. Dt 16:18). This is perh. the place for 1 Pt 4:6 ἵνα κριθῶσιν κατὰ ἀνθρ. (s. ESelwyn, comm. ad loc. ref. to Lghtf.; cp. Wsd 3:4).

ⓑ esp. pass an unfavorable judgment upon, criticize, find fault with, condemn (Epict. 2, 21, 11) Ro 2:1abc, 3; 14:3f, 10, 13a (a play on words, w. κρίνειν used in two different mngs. in the same vs.; s. 4 below on vs. 13b); Col 2:16; Js 4:11, 12; D 11:12. μή τι κρίνετε do not pronounce judgment on anything 1 Cor 4:5. ἱνατί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως; why is my freedom (of action) to be unfavorably judged by another person’s scruples? 1 Cor 10:29. μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτόν happy is the one who finds no fault w. himself Ro 14:22.—Also of a human judgment directed against God ὅπως ἂν νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε that you may win when you are judged Ro 3:4 (OMichel in KEK prefers active sense); 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6).

③ to make a judgment based on taking various factors into account, judge, think, consider, look upon w. double acc. of the obj. and the predicate (Soph., Oed. R. 34; Pla., Rep. 9, 578b and s. Cebes 39, 4; 3 Macc 2:33; Just., D. 112, 1) οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτούς you do not consider yourselves worthy Ac 13:46 (Jos., Ant. 6, 159 ὸ̔ν αὐτὸς τ. βασιλείας ἄξιον ἔκρινεν; EpArist 98); cp. PtK 3 p. 15, 17. τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε you considered their shortcomings as your own 1 Cl 2:6. Pass. (Thu. 2, 40, 3; Jos., Ant. 4, 193) τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; why do you think it is incredible? Ac 26:8 (Jos., Ant. 18, 76 ἄπιστα αὐτὰ κρίνειν).—Foll. by acc. w. inf. (Pla., Gorg., 452c, Rep. 9, 578b; X., An. 1, 9, 5; 28) κεκρίκατέ με πιστὴν … εἶναι Ac 16:15.—W. inf. foll. κρίνω μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς κτλ. 15:19.—Foll. by τοῦτο ὅτι 2 Cor 5:14.—W. direct quest. foll. ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε judge, decide for yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.—W. indirect quest. foll. (Thu. 4, 130, 7 κρίναντες ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, εἰ … ; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 5) εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε decide whether it is right to obey you rather than God Ac 4:19.—κρίνατε ὑμεῖς ὅ φημι pass your own judgment on what I say 1 Cor 10:15.—ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας you have judged rightly Lk 7:43.

④ to come to a conclusion after a cognitive process, reach a decision, decide, propose, intend (Isocr. 4, 46; Polyb. 3, 6, 7; 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; Epict. 2, 15, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 14, 118 §497 ὅταν οἱ θεοὶ κρίνωσιν; LXX) τί οὖν θέλετε, κρίνατε (restored) so decide now what you wish (to be done); w. inf. (Diod S 4, 33, 10; 17, 95, 1; UPZ 42, 37 [162 B.C.]; PTebt 55, 4 [II B.C.] ἔκρινα γράψαι; PLond III, 897, 11 p. 207 [84 A.D.]; 1 Macc 11:33; 3 Macc 1:6; Jdth 11:13; Wsd 8:9; Jos., Ant.7, 33; 12, 403; 13, 188; Did., Gen. 179, 7) Ac 3:13; 20:16; 25:25; 1 Cor 2:2; 5:3; Tit 3:12. W. τοῦ and inf. (B-D-F §397, 2) ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς Ac 27:1. ἐπεὶ ἤδη σεαυτῷ κέκρικας τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς ἐντολὰς ταύτας ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπου φυλαχθῆναι since you have already decided in your own mind that these commandments cannot be kept by anyone Hm 12, 3, 6.—W. acc. and inf. (2 Macc 11:25, 36; 3 Macc 6:30; TestSol 10:8; SibOr 3, 127; Just., D. 102, 2) Ac 21:25 (even in the substantially different rdgs.). τοῦτο κέκρικεν …, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον he has determined this, namely to keep his fiancée (pure and undefiled) 1 Cor 7:37 (s. s.v. γαμίζω 2; Diod S 4, 73, 2 of a father: κρίναι ταύτην [i.e. his daughter] παρθένον διαφυλάττειν). τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα but rather decide this, (namely) to give no offense Ro 14:13b. ἔκρινα ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο, τὸ … ἐλθεῖν 2 Cor 2:1. τὰ δόγματα τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τ. ἀποστόλων Ac 16:4 (cp. Polyb. 5, 52, 6 πράξας τὸ κριθέν; Epict. 2, 15, 7 τοῖς κριθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν δεῖ).

⑤ to engage in a judicial process, judge, decide, hale before a court, condemn, also hand over for judicial punishment, freq. as a legal t.t. (in a forensic sense Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).

ⓐ of a human court

α. act. and pass. abs. Ac 13:27. W. adv. GPt 3:7. κ. τινά: κατὰ τὸν νόμον J 18:31; Ac 23:3; 24:6 v.l. οὐδὲ ἐγὼ κρίνω ὑμᾶς GJs 16:3. Of the right of the apostle and the church to judge believers 1 Cor 5:12ab. μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον; does our law (personified) judge a person? J 7:51 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 50 §205 certain senators desire that before Mark Antony is declared a public enemy he should be brought to trial, ὡς οὐ πάτριον σφίσιν ἀκρίτου καταδικάζειν ‘on the ground that it was not their ancestral custom to condemn someone without a hearing’). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε I will punish you on the basis of your own statement Lk 19:22. Pass. Ac 25:10. κρίνεσθαι ἐπί τινι be on trial because of a thing 26:6 (Appian, Basil. 12 κρινόμενος ἐπὶ τῷδε=be brought to trial because of this thing; likew. Iber. 55 §233; Ath. 2, 3; of God ApcrEzk Fgm. d). Also περί τινος (Diod S 12, 30, 5) 23:6; 25:20; w. addition of ἐπί w. gen. of the court of judicature before someone (schol. on Hes., Op. 9) 24:21; 25:9; D 11:11.—τί δὲ καὶ ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον; Lk 12:57, which leads over into the sphere of jurisprudence (vs. 58), means: why cannot you yourselves decide what is right? (cp. the prayer for vengeance fr. Amorgos [BCH 25, 1901 p. 416; Dssm., LO 94=LAE 118] ἐπάκουσον, θεά, καὶ κρῖναι τὸ δίκαιον; cp. Appian, Mithrid. 89 §403 κρίνειν τὴν μάχην=decide the battle; Just., A II, 15, 5).

β. mid. and pass.: ‘dispute, quarrel, debate’, also go to law (so Thu. 4, 122, 4 δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι; Hos 2:4 al. in LXX; TestSol 4:4ff D; Mel., P. 101, 773) τινί with someone (Job 9:3; 13:19) Mt 5:40; B 6:1 (Is 50:8); μετά τινος (Vi. Aesopi W 76 κριθῆναί με μετὰ τῆς κυρίας μου ἐπὶ σοί=I am pleading my case with my mistress before you; Eccl 6:10) 1 Cor 6:6. ἐπί τινος before someone (as judge) vs. 1 (on the beginning of 1 Cor 6 cp. the decree of Alexander to the Greeks in Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21: βούλομαι δὲ μὴ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς κρίνειν ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον, οὐδὲ ἐφʼ οὗ βούλεσθε=it is my wish [will] that you are not to go to law among yourselves, no matter what any of you may have against another, nor before anyone you wish).

ⓑ of the divine tribunal

α. occupied by God or Christ: abs. administer justice, judge J 5:30; 8:16, 50; cp. vs. 26; Rv 6:10; B 5:7. Pass. be judged Mt 7:1b, 2b; Lk 6:37b; Rv 11:18.—W. acc. foll. (PGM 4, 1013 of Horus ὁ κρίνων τὰ πάντα) J 5:22; 8:15b. τοὺς ἔξω 1 Cor 5:13. ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς judge the living and the dead 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; B 7:2. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων Ro 2:16. τὸν κόσμον B 4:12 (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 10 [Stone p. 32]; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 8 Tdf.). τὴν οἰκουμένην Ac 17:31; AcPl Ha 9, 29. κ. κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον judge each one by what that person does 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Rv 20:13. ἐκρίθησαν οἱ νεκροὶ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν the dead were judged by what was written in the books (of life and of death), in accordance w. their deeds vs. 12; δικαίως κ. judge uprightly (Sotades [280 B.C.] Fgm. 11, 2 Diehl² II 6 p. 191 [in Stob. 4, 34, 8 vol. V p. 826, 5=Coll. Alex. p. 243] ὁ παντογενὴς … οὐ κρίνει δικαίως) 1 Pt 2:23; B 19:11. Also ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ Rv 19:11. διὰ νόμου κρίνεσθαι be judged on the basis of the law Js 2:12.—Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish (opp. σῴζειν as TestJud 24:6; Mel., P. 104, 810; cp. ApcEsdr 1, 11 p. 25, 3 Tdf. ἐμὲ κρῖνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) J 3:17; cp. 18ab; 12:47ab, 48a; cp. 48b; Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14); Dg 7:5f (opp. ἀγαπᾶν). διὰ νόμου κ. punish on the basis of the law Ro 2:12.—3:6f; 1 Cor 11:31f (here of the temporal punishment which God brings upon sinners); 2 Th 2:12; Hb 10:30 (κρινεῖ κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ the Lord will judge = punish his people is derived fr. Dt 32:36=Ps 134:14, where the judgment of God is spoken of, resulting in the vindication of the innocent [the thought prominent in the two OT pass.] and the punishment of the guilty [the thought prominent in the Hb pass.]); 13:4; Js 5:9; for 1 Pt 4:6 s. 2a above; Rv 18:8; 19:2; B 15:5.—W. the punishment given κ. διὰ πυρός 1 Cl 11:1; διὰ τῶν μαστίγων 17:5. κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ already condemned to death B 10:5. Also εἰς θάνατον condemned to death Hs 9, 18, 2. οἱ κρινόμενοι ἀσεβεῖς the godless, who are condemned 2 Cl 18:1. Of the devil ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται J 16:11.—ταῦτα ἔκρινας you have imposed these punishments Rv 16:5.—On κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα 18:20 s. κρίμα 4.

β. occupied by those who have been divinely commissioned to judge: the 12 apostles judge the 12 tribes Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30 (PBatiffol, RB n.s. 9, 1912, 541–43. But here κ. could have the broader sense rule; cp. 4 Km 15:5; Ps 2:10; 1 Macc 9:73; PsSol 17:29). κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία … σέ the one who is physically uncircumcised will sit in judgment upon you Ro 2:27. οἱ ἅγιοι as judges of the cosmos 1 Cor 6:2ab (κρίνεσθαι ἐν: Diod S 19, 51, 4.—On the saints as co-rulers with God cp. Epict., Ench. 15; Sallust. 21 p. 36, 14) as well as of the angels vs. 3 (cp. Da 7:22).

⑥ to ensure justice for someone, see to it that justice is done (LXX) τινί to someone 1 Cl 8:4 (Is 1:17).—B. 1428. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

μέχρι even before vowels as in Attic Lk 16:16; Job 32:12. In three places in the NT (Mk 13:30 and Gal 4:19 μέχρις οὗ, Hb 12:4 μέχρις αἵματος) as well as Hv 4, 1, 9 (μέχρις ὅτε), Hs 9, 11, 1 (μέχρις ὀψέ) the form used before vowels is μέχρις (Vett. Val. 357, 19; IG XII, 5, 647; SIG 888, 150 [before a conson.]; 958, 16; 1109, 41; Threatte II 669–71; pap [Mayser p. 244]. On the LXX s. Thackeray p. 136.—B-D-F §21; Mlt-H. 113; 331) gener. ‘until’: in our lit. as prep. w. gen. (Hom. +) and conj. (Thu., Pla., et al.)

① marker of extension up to a point in an area, as far as, w. gen. μ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ GPt 10:40. μ. τῆς Ἀσίας Ac 20:4 D. ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ…μ. τοῦ Ἰλλυρικοῦ Ro 15:19 (ἀπὸ…μ. as SIG 973, 6f). μ. τῶν ἔσω φλεβῶν MPol 2:2 (Jos., Bell. 6, 304 μ. ὀστέων).

② marker of continuance in time up to a point, until

ⓐ as prep. w. gen. μ. (τῆς) νῦν IMg 8:1; Papias (3:3) (Chion, Ep. 16, 4; Longus 4, 16, 2; Xenophon Eph. 1, 4, 1; Jos., Ant. 7, 386; 17, 114; Just., D. 82, 1 and 3 al.; cp. μ. τοῦ νῦν Χ., Cyr. 7, 3, 15; PTebt 50, 26 [112/11 B.C.]; BGU 256, 9; Just., D. 78, 8). μ. ὀψέ Hs 9, 11, 1. μέχρι τίνος; how long? (Just., A I, 32, 2; Alciphron 4, 17, 2; Achilles Tat. 2, 5, 1) v 3, 10, 9. μ. τῆς σήμερον until today (Jos., Ant. 9, 28) Mt 11:23; cp. 28:15; Hv 2, 2, 4. μ. μεσονυκτίου until midnight Ac 20:7. μ. Ἰωάννου until (the time of) John Lk 16:16. μ. τῆς ἐπιφανείας τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Ti 6:14 (Just., D. 120, 3 μ.…τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Χριστοῦ). μ. καιροῦ διορθώσεως Hb 9:10. μ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ (for ἕως; another v.l. ἄχρι) until harvest time Mt 13:30 v.l. μ. τέλους Hb 3:6 v.l., 14 (cp. Ar. [Milne 76, 47f] μ. τελειώσεως χρόνων).—ἀπό…μ. (POxy 1647, 20 ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς ἡλίου μέχρι δύσεως; EpArist 298): ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μ. ταύτης τῆς ὥρας from the fourth day to this hour Ac 10:30. ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ μ. Μωϋσέως Ro 5:14 (cp. Just., D. 92, 2 ἀπὸ Ἀβραὰμ μ. Μωϋσέως).

ⓑ as a conjunction until (B-D-F §383, 2; Rob. 975) μ. καταντήσωμεν Eph 4:13 (cp. Hdt. 4, 119, 4; SIG 976, 71 μέχρι ποιήσωσιν; PCairPreis 48, 7 μέχρι τὸ πλοιαρίδιον εὑρῶμεν; TestSol 9:8 P; SibOr 3, 570. On the omission of ἄν s. Mlt. 168f; Rydbeck, 144–53). μ. οὗ w. subjunctive (Herodas 2, 43; 8, 8 [Cunningham reads μέχρις εὖ in both]; POxy 293, 7 [27 A.D.] μέχρι οὗ ἀποστείλῃς Da 11:36 Theod.; EpArist 298) Mk 13:30 (μ. ὅτου v.l.); Gal 4:19. μ. ὅτε (ὅτου v.l.) Hv 4, 1, 9; GJs 10:2 (s. B-D-F §455, 3).

③ marker of degree or measure, to the point of, w. gen. (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 69 §284 μ. τοῦ τέλους=to the end; Jos., Ant. 11, 81 μ. θρήνων; Ath. 12:3 μ. τοσούτου) κακοπαθεῖν μ. δεσμῶν suffer even to the point of being imprisoned 2 Ti 2:9. μ. αἵματος ἀντικαταστῆναι resist to the point of shedding one’s blood in being wounded or killed Hb 12:4 (μ. αἵμ. as Herodian 2, 6, 14). μ. θανάτου διωχθῆναι καὶ μ. δουλείας εἰσελθεῖν 1 Cl 4:9 (cp. 2 Macc 13:14; Jos., Bell. 2, 141). Of Christ ὑπήκοος μ. θανάτου obedient to the point of death Phil 2:8 (cp. PTor I, 1 VII, 28 [116 B.C.] μ. τελευτῆς βιοῦ). Of Epaphroditus διὰ τὸ ἔργον Χριστοῦ μ. θανάτου ἤγγισεν vs. 30 (μέχρι θανάτου to denote degree: Diod S 15, 27, 2; Cebes 26, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 113 §471; 3, 77 §314; 3, 90 §372; 4, 135 §570 al.; Polyaenus 7, 30; 8, 49; Just., D. 11, 4 al.; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 3, 427–31a; 2 Macc 13:14).—DELG. M-M.

σημεῖον, ου, τό (s. prec. entry; Aeschyl., Hdt.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb.; Hippol., Ref. 6, 27, 4; Did., Gen. 115, 9 ‘symbol’; gener. ‘sign’)

① a sign or distinguishing mark whereby someth. is known, sign, token, indication (Diod S 3, 66, 3=evidences τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ θεοῦ; Cornutus 16 p. 21, 9.—Arrian, Anab. 6, 26, 4 of marks in the landscape showing direction; ParJer 5:11 τὰ ς. τῆς πόλεως; Just., A I, 55, 6 al.; Iren. 1, 14, 8 [Harv. I 143, 10]; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 43, 36 ς. τῆς μετὰ θάνατον ἐπιφανείας αὐτοῦ [sc. Ἰησοῦ]; 2, 59, 6 of the scars of the resurrected Lord τὰ ς. τῆς κολάσεως). τοῦτο ὑμῖν σημεῖον this (will be) a sign for you Lk 2:12 (cp. Is 37:30). ὅ ἐστιν ς. ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ this is the mark of genuineness in every letter 2 Th 3:17 (Ps.-Pla., Ep. 13, 360a has at its beginning the words σύμβολον ὅτι παρʼ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν). Of a signal previously agreed upon δοῦναί τινι σημεῖον (PFay 128, 7 ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν σημεῖον ‘he gave us a signal’; Jos., Ant. 12, 404) Mt 26:48; 1 Cl 12:7.— A sign of things to come (PsSol 15:9 τὸ … σημεῖον ἀπωλείας ἐπὶ τοῦ μετώπου αὐτῶν; Did., Gen. 191, 6; Philo, Op. M. 58 σημεῖα μελλόντων; Jos., Bell. 6, 285; 296; 297) Mk 13:4; Lk 21:7. The event to be expected is added in the gen. τί τὸ ς. τῆς σῆς παρουσίας; Mt 24:3. τὸ ς. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου the sign by which one can mark the coming of the Human One (Son of Man) vs. 30 (TGlasson, JTS 15, ’64, 299f [a military metaphor, ‘standard’; cp. Is 18:3; 1QM 3f]). τὰ σημεῖα τῶν καιρῶν the signs of the (end)times (καιρός 3b) Mt 16:3.— A sign of warning (Plut., Caes. 737 [63, 1]; SibOr 3, 457; Mel., P. 14, 90) 1 Cl 11:2. Prob. in like manner αἱ γλῶσσαι εἰς σημεῖόν εἰσιν τοῖς ἀπίστοις the tongues (γλῶσσα 3) serve as a (warning) sign to the unbelievers 1 Cor 14:22. Likew. the sign of Jonah (s. Ἰωνᾶς 1) in Luke: Lk 11:29, 30. Here the Human One is to be a sign to his generation, as Jonah was to the Ninevites; cp. οὗτος κεῖται εἰς σημεῖον ἀντιλεγόμενον (s. ἀντιλέγω 2) 2:34 (cp. Is 11:12).—W-S. §30, 10d.—GRunze, Das Zeichen des Menschensohnes u. der Doppelsinn des Jonazeichens 1897 (against him PSchmiedel, Lit. Centralblatt 48, 1897, 513–15; Runze again, ZWT 41, 1898, 171–85; finally PSchm. ibid. 514–25); PAsmussen, Protestantenblatt 37, 1904, 375–8; STyson, Bibl. World 33,1909, 96–101; CBowen, AJT 20, 1916, 414–21; JMichael, JTS 21, 1920, 146–59; JBonsirven, RSR 24, ’34, 450–55; HGale, JBL 60, ’41, 255–60; PSeidelin, Das Jonaszeichen, StTh 5, ’51, 119–31; AVögtle, Wikenhauser Festschr. ’53, 230–77; OGlombitza, D. Zeichen des Jona, NTS 8, ’62, 359–66.—In the OT circumcision is σημεῖον διαθήκης=a sign or token of belonging to the covenant (Gen 17:11). For Paul this sign becomes a mark, or seal (so σημεῖον: PRev 26, 5 [III B.C.]; PRein 9 introd. [II B.C.]; 35, 3; BGU 1064, 18) σημεῖον ἔλαβεν περιτομῆς σφραγῖδα he got the mark of circumcision as a seal Ro 4:11. In the difficult pass. B 12:5 ἐν σημείῳ is prob. best taken as by a sign; but it is poss. that the text is defective (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.; RKraft, Did. and Barnabas ’65, 119 note: ‘standard, norm’).—τὰ σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 2 Cor 12:12a belongs rather to the next category; the signs of the (true) apostle (cp. SIG 831, 14 [117 A.D.] ἡγούμην σημεῖα ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν) are, as is shown by the verb κατειργάσθη and what follows, the wonders or miracles performed by him.

② an event that is an indication or confirmation of intervention by transcendent powers, miracle, portent

ⓐ miracle

α. a miracle of divine origin, performed by God himself, by Christ, or by men of God (cp. Diod S 5, 70, 4 πολλὰ ς. of the young Zeus; 16, 27, 2 ἐγένετο αὐτῷ σημεῖον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος; Strabo 16, 2, 35 παρὰ τ. θεοῦ ς.; Appian, Ital. 8 §1 σημείων γενομένων ἐκ Διός, Hann. 56 §233; SIG 709, 25 [c. 107 B.C.] διὰ τῶν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ γενομένων σαμείων; PGM 1, 65; 74; Jos., Ant. 2, 274; 280; Mel., P. 78, 568): Mt 12:38f; 16:1 (ς. ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ), 4; Mk 8:11 (ς. ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, as Synes., Prov. 1, 7; s. OLinton, The Demand for a Sign from Heaven, StTh 19, ’65, 112–29; JGibson, JSNT 38, ’90, 37–66, a phenomenon suggesting divine deliverance), 12; 16:17, 20; Lk 11:16 (ς. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ), 29 (s. 1 above); 23:8; J 2:11, 18, 23; 3:2; 4:54; 6:2, 14, 26, 30; 7:31; 9:16; 10:41; 11:47; 12:18, 37; 20:30 (on σημ. as a designation of Jesus’ miracles in J s. Hdb. on J 2:11 and 6:26; JBernard, ICC John 1929, I introd. 176–86; CBarrett, The Gosp. acc. to St. John, ’55, 62–65); Ac 4:16, 22 (τὸ ς. τῆς ἰάσεως the miracle of healing); 8:6; 1 Cor 1:22; Agr 9. τί εἴδετε σημεῖον ἐπὶ τὸν γεννηθέντα βασιλέα; what kind of sign did you see over the newborn king? GJs 21:2 (codd.). τὸ σημεῖον τὸ ἐνάρετον the marvelous sign AcPl Ha 3,16.—σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα (Polyb. 3, 112, 8 σημείων δὲ καὶ τεράτων πᾶν μὲν ἱερόν, πᾶσα δʼ ἦν οἰκία πλήρης; Plut., Alex. 706 [75, 1 sing.]; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 36 §144 τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα οὐράνια; 4, 4 §14; Aelian, VH 12, 57; Philo, Mos. 1, 95, Aet. M. 2; Jos., Bell. 1, 28, Ant. 20, 168. Oft. in LXX: Ex 7:3; Dt 4:34; 6:22; 7:19 al.; Is 8:18; 20:3; Jer 39:21; Wsd 8:8; 10:16) J 4:48; Ac 2:43; 4:30; 5:12; 6:8; 7:36; 14:3; 15:12; Ro 15:19; Hb 2:4; 1 Cl 51:5; B 4:14; 5:8. δυνάμεις καὶ τέρατα κ. σημεῖα Ac 2:22; 2 Cor 12:12b (SSchreiber, Paulus als Wundertäter: BZNW 79, ’96) σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις Ac 8:13.—1 Cl 25:1; 2 Cl 15:4. SMc-Casland, JBL 76, ’57, 149–52; MWhittaker, Studia Evangelica 5, ’68, 155–58.

β. worked by Satan or his agents to mislead God’s people (s. Iren. 5, 28, 2 [Harv. V 401, 32]) Rv 13:13f; 16:14; 19:20. σημεῖα κ. τέρατα Mt 24:24; Mk 13:22 (GBeasley-Murray, A Commentary on Mk 13, ’57; EGrässer, D. Problem der Parusie-verzögerung, ’57, 152–70); 2 Th 2:9; D 16:4.

ⓑ portent terrifying appearances in the heavens, never before seen, as portents of the last days Lk 21:11, 25 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 4 §14 σημεῖα πολλά around the sun; AscIs 3, 20); Ac 2:19 (cp. Jo 3:3); s. D 16:6. Of that which the seer of the Apocalypse sees ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ Rv 12:1, 3; 15:1. Of the portentous signs in heaven and earth at the death of Jesus GPt 8:28 (cp. Da 6:28 Theod. σημεῖα κ. τέρατα ἐν οὐρανῷ κ. ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς; Diod S 38 + 39 Fgm. 5: at the end of each one of the eight ages ordained by God there is a σημεῖον ἐκ γῆς ἢ οὐρανοῦ θαυμάσιον).—On miracles s. SIG 1168–73; RLembert, Das Wunder bei Römern u. Griechen I 1905; RReitzenstein, Hellenist. Wundererzählungen 1906, OWeinreich, Antike Heilungswunder 1909, Gebet u. Wunder: WSchmid Festschr. 1929, 169ff; PWendland, De Fabellis Antiquis earumque ad Christianos Propagatione 1911; FKutsch, Attische Heilgötter u. Heilheroen 1913; WJayne, The Healing Gods of Ancient Civilizations 1925; RHerzog, D. Wunderheilungen v. Epidaurus ’31; PFiebig, Jüdische Wundergeschichten des ntl. Zeitalters 1911; ASchlatter, Das Wunder in d. Synagoge 1912.—RLehmann, Naturwissenschaft u. bibl. Wunderfrage 1930; GNaumann, Die Wertschätzung des Wunders im NT 1903; GTraub, Das Wunder im NT² 1907; KBeth, Die Wunder Jesu 1908; JThompson, Miracles in the NT 1911; LFonck, Die Wunder des Herrn im Ev.² 1907; LFillion, Les miracles de Jésus-Christ 1909/1910; PDausch, Die Wunder Jesu 1912; SEitrem, Nordisk Tidskrift for Filologie 5, 1919, 30–36; RBultmann, Die Gesch. der synopt. Tradition² ’31, 223–60; RJelke, Die Wunder Jesu 1922; GShafto, The Wonders of the Kingdom 1924; JBest, The Miracles of Christ in the Light of our Present Day Knowledge ’37; TTorrance, Expository Studies in St. John’s Miracles ’38; ARichardson, The Miracle Stories of the Gospels ’41; AFridrichsen, Le Problème du Miracle dans le Christianisme primitif: Études d’ Hist. et de Phil. rel. XII 1925; HSchlingensiepen, Die Wunder des NT ’33; OPerels, D. Wunderüberlieferung der Synoptiker ’34; PSaintyves, Essais de folklore biblique 1923; GMarquardt, D. Wunderproblem in d. deutschen prot. Theologie der Gegenwart ’33; GDelling, D. Verständnis des Wunders im NT, ZST 24, ’55, 265–80, Zur Beurteilung des Wunders durch d. Antike: Studien zum NT ’70, 53–71; SMcCasland, Signs and Wonders, JBL 76, ’57, 149–52; CBarrett, The Gosp. Acc. to John ’55, 62–65; JCharlier, La notion de signe (sêmeion) dans J: RSPT 43, ’59, 434–48; PRiga, Signs of Glory (J): Int 17, ’63, 402–24; HvanderLoos, The Miracles of Jesus ’65; WNicol, The Semeia in the Fourth Gosp. ’72; for Acts s. FNeirynck, the Miracle Stories in the Acts of the Apostles, An Introduction, in Les Actes des Apôtres, ed. JKremer ’79, 169–213.—Esp. on the healing of demoniacs JWeiss, RE IV 408ff; JJaeger, Ist Jesus Christus ein Suggestionstherapeut gewesen? 1918; KKnur, M.D., Christus medicus? 1905; KDusberger, Bibel u. Kirche ’51, 114–17 (foretoken).—RGrant, Miracle and Natural Law in Graeco-Roman and Early Christian Thought ’52. S. also the lit. s.v. δαιμόνιον 2.—See further MWestermann, ed. ΠΑΡΑΔΟΞΑΓΡΑΦΟΙ, Scriptores Rerum Mirabilium Graeci, 1839.—B. 914. DELG s.v. σῆμα. M-M. DBS XII 1281–1330. EDNT. ABD IV 869 (lit.). TW. Spicq. Sv.

ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.

① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away from

ⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.

ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.

ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.

ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.

ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.

ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.

② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.

ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.

ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).

α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.

β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.

γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.³-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.

ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).

α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).

β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.

③ to indicate origin or source, from

ⓐ lit., with verbs of motion

α. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.

β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.

ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.

ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.

ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.

ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).

④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).

⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcome

ⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).

ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).

ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).

ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer⁶-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).

ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, of

α. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.

β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.

⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.² 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach³, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M.

ἴδιος, ία, ον (Hom.+; s. B-D-F §286; W-S. §22, 17; Rob. 691f; Mlt-Turner 191f.—For the spelling ἵδιος s. on ὀλίγος.)

① pert. to belonging or being related to oneself, one’s own

ⓐ in contrast to what is public property or belongs to another: private, one’s own (exclusively) (opp. κοινός, as Pla., Pol. 7, 535b; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 41 §171; Ath. 25, 4) οὐδὲ εἷς τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ ἔλεγεν ἴδιον εἶναι nor did anyone claim that anything the person had was private property or nor did anyone claim ownership of private possessions Ac 4:32; cp. D 4:8.

ⓑ in respect to circumstance or condition belonging to an individual (opp. ἀλλότριος) κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν according to each one’s capability (in contrast to that of others) Mt 25:15. τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰ. ζητεῖ J 7:18; cp. 5:18, 43. ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν Lk 2:3 v.l. (for ἑαυτοῦ); sim. Mt 9:1 (noting the departure of Jesus to his home territory); cp. Dg 5:2. Christ ἐλευθερώσῃ πᾶσαν σάρκα διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. vs. 16 ἕκαστος τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν Ac 2:8; cp. 1:19 τῇ ἰ. διαλέκτῳ αὐτῶν, without pron. 2:6 (Tat. 26, 1 τὴν ἰ. αὐτῆς … λέξιν); ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει 3:12; cp. 28:30; τἡν ἰ. (δικαιοσύνην) Ro 10:3; cp. 11:24; 14:4f. ἕκαστος τ. ἴ. μισθὸν λήμψεται κατὰ τ. ἴ. κόπον each will receive wages in proportion to each one’s labor 1 Cor 3:8. ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα her own husband 7:2 (Diog. L. 8, 43 πρὸς τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα πορεύεσθαι). ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα 7:7. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴδιον δεῖπνον προλαμβάνει (s. προλαμβάνω 1c) 1 Cor 11:21 (Eratosth.: 241 Fgm. 16 Jac. of the festival known as Lagynophoria τὰ κομισθέντα αὑτοῖς δειπνοῦσι κατακλιθέντες … κ. ἐξ ἰδίας ἕκαστος λαγύνου παρʼ αὑτῶν φέροντες πίνουσιν ‘they dine on the things brought them … and they each drink from a flagon they have personally brought’. Evaluation: συνοίκια ταῦτα ῥυπαρά• ἀνάγκη γὰρ τὴν σύνοδον γίνεσθαι παμμιγοῦς ὄχλου ‘that’s some crummy banquet; it’s certainly a meeting of a motley crew’); cp. 1 Cor 9:7; 15:38. ἕκαστος τὸ ἴ. φορτίον βαστάσει Gal 6:5.—Tit 1:12; Hb 4:10; 7:27; 9:12; 13:12.—J 4:44 s. 2 and 3b.

② pert. to a striking connection or an exclusive relationship, own (with emphasis when expressed orally, or italicized in written form) κοπιῶμεν ταῖς ἰ. χερσίν with our own hands 1 Cor 4:12 (first pers., cp. UPZ 13, 14 [158 B.C.] εἰμὶ μετὰ τ. ἀδελφοῦ ἰδίου=w. my brother; TestJob 34:3 ἀναχωρήσωμεν εἰς τὰς ἰδίας χώρας). ἐν τῷ ἰ. ὀφθαλμῷ in your own eye Lk 6:41; 1 Th 2:14; 2 Pt 3:17 (here the stability of the orthodox is contrasted with loss of direction by those who are misled by error). Ac 1:7 (God’s authority in sharp contrast to the apostles’ interest in determining a schedule of events). ἰ. θέλημα own will and ἰδία καρδία own heart or mind 1 Cor 7:37ab contrast with μὴ ἔχων ἀνάγκην ‘not being under compulsion’; hence ἰ. is not simply equivalent to the possessive gen. in the phrase ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ. 1 Cor 6:18, ἰ. heightens the absurdity of sinning against one’s own body. Lk 10:34 (apparently the storyteller suggests that the wealthy Samaritan had more than one animal, but put his own at the service of the injured traveler). ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. ἐπὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἔμετον Pr 26:11), with heightening of disgust. Some would put J 4:44 here (s. 1 end). εἰς τὸν ἴδιον ἀγρόν Mt 22:5 (the rude guest prefers the amenities of his own estate). Mk 4:34b (Jesus’ close followers in contrast to a large crowd). Ac 25:19 (emphasizing the esoteric nature of sectarian disputes). Js 1:14 (a contrast, not between types of desire but of sources of temptation: those who succumb have only themselves to blame). διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου through his own blood Ac 20:28 (so NRSV mg.; cp. the phrase SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων commonly associated with the gifts of generous officials, s. 4b. That the ‘blood’ would be associated with Jesus would be quite apparent to Luke’s publics).

③ pert. to a person, through substitution for a pronoun, own. Some of the passages cited in 2 may belong here. ἴ. is used for the gen. of αὐτός or the possess. pron., or for the possess. gen. ἑαυτοῦ, ἑαυτῶν (this use found in Hellenistic wr. [Schmidt 369], in Attic [Meisterhans³-Schw. 235] and Magnesian [Thieme 28f] ins; pap [Kuhring—s. ἀνά beg.—14; Mayser II/2, 73f]. S. also Dssm., B 120f [BS 123f], and against him Mlt. 87–91. LXX oft. uses ἴ. without emphasis to render the simple Hebr. personal suffix [Gen 47:18; Dt 15:2; Job 2:11; 7:10, 13; Pr 6:2 al.], but somet. also employs it without any basis for it in the original text [Job 24:12; Pr 9:12; 22:7; 27:15]. Da 1:10, where LXX has ἴ., Theod. uses μου. 1 Esdr 5:8 εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν=2 Esdr 2:1 εἰς πόλιν αὐτοῦ; Mt 9:1 is formally sim., but its position in the narrative suggests placement in 1)

ⓐ with the second pers. (Jos., Bell. 6, 346 ἰδίαις χερσίν=w. your own hands). Eph 5:22 (cp. vs. 28 τὰς ἑαυτῶν γυναῖκας); 1 Th 4:11; 1 Pt 3:1.

ⓑ with the third pers. ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι J 4:44 (cp. ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ: Mt 13:57; Mk 6:4; Lk 4:24, but J 4:44 is expressed in a slightly difft. form and may therefore belong in 1b above); Mt 25:14; 15:20 v.l.; J 1:41 (UPZ 13, s. 2 above: ἀδ. ἴ.); Ac 1:19; 24:24; 1 Ti 6:1; Tit 2:5, 9; 1 Pt 3:5; MPol 17:3; AcPl Ha 3, 21; 4, 27 (context uncertain); τὸ ἴδιον πλάσμα AcPlCor 2:12, 1; ἴδιον χωρίον Papias (3:3).

④ as subst., person or thing associated with an entity

ⓐ associates, relations οἱ ἴδιοι (comrades in battle: Polyaenus, Exc. 14, 20; SIG 709, 19; 22; 2 Macc 12:22; Jos., Bell. 1, 42, Ant. 12, 405; compatriots: ViHab 5 [p. 86, 7 Sch.]; Philo, Mos. 1, 177) fellow-Christians Ac 4:23; 24:23 (Just., D. 121, 3). The disciples (e.g., of a philosopher: Epict. 3, 8, 7) J 13:1. Relatives (BGU 37; POxy 932; PFay 110; 111; 112; 116; 122 al.; Vett. Val. 70, 5 ὑπὸ ἰδίων κ. φίλων; Sir 11:34; Just., A II, 7, 2 σὺν τοῖς ἰδίοις … Νῶε and D. 138, 2 Νῶε … μετὰ τῶν ἰδίων) 1 Ti 5:8; J 1:11b (the worshipers of a god are also so called: Herm. Wr. 1, 31).—Sg. τὸν ἴδιον J 15:19 v.l. (s. b below).

ⓑ home, possessions τὰ ἴδια home (Polyb. 2, 57, 5; 3, 99, 4; Appian, Iber. 23; Peripl. Eryth. 65 εἰς τὰ ἴδια; POxy 4, 9f ἡ ἀνωτέρα ψυχὴ τ. ἴδια γεινώσκει; 487, 18; Esth 5:10; 6:12; 1 Esdr 6:31 [τὰ ἴδια αὐτοῦ=2 Esdr 6:11 ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ]; 3 Macc 6:27, 37; 7:8; Jos., Ant. 8, 405; 416, Bell. 1, 666; 4, 528) J 16:32 (EFascher, ZNW 39, ’41, 171–230); 19:27; Ac 5:18 D; 14:18 v.l.; 21:6; AcPl Ha 8, 5. Many (e.g. Goodsp, Probs. 87f; 94–96; Field, Notes 84; RSV; but not Bultmann 34f; NRSV) prefer this sense for J 1:11a and Lk 18:28; another probability in both these pass. is property, possessions (POxy 489, 4; 490, 3; 491, 3; 492, 4 al.). ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων from his own well-stocked supply (oft. in ins e.g. fr. Magn. and Priene, also SIG 547, 37; 1068, 16 [in such ins the focus is on the generosity of public-spirited officals who use their own resources to meet public needs]; Jos., Ant. 12, 158) J 8:44. The sg. can also be used in this way τὸ ἴδιον (SIG 1257, 3; BGU 1118, 31 [22 B.C.]) J 15:19 (v.l. τὸν ἴδιον, s. a above).—τὰ ἴδια one’s own affairs (X., Mem. 3, 4, 12; 2 Macc 9:20; 11:23 v.l., 26, 29) 1 Th 4:11, here πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια=mind your own business.— Jd 6 of one’s proper sphere.

⑤ pert. to a particular individual, by oneself, privately, adv. ἰδίᾳ (Aristoph., Thu.; Diod S 20, 21, 5 et al.; ins, pap, 2 Macc 4:34; Philo; Jos., Bell. 4, 224, C. Ap. 1, 225; Ath. 8, 1f) 1 Cor 12:11; IMg 7:1.—κατʼ ἰδίαν (Machon, Fgm. 11 vs. 121 [in Athen. 8, 349b]; Polyb. 4, 84, 8; Diod S 1, 21, 6; also ins [SIG 1157, 12 καὶ κατὰ κοινὸν καὶ κατʼ ἰδίαν ἑκάστῳ al.]; 2 Macc 4:5; 14:21; JosAs 7:1; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 136; Just., D. 5, 2) privately, by oneself (opp. κοινῇ: Jos., Ant. 4, 310) Mt 14:13, 23; 17:1, 19; 20:17; 24:3; Mk 4:34a; 6:31f; 7:33 (Diod S 18, 49, 2 ἕκαστον ἐκλαμβάνων κατʼ ἰδίαν=‘he took each one aside’); 9:2 (w. μόνος added), 28; 13:3; Lk 9:10; 10:23; Ac 23:19; Gal 2:2 (on the separate meeting cp. Jos., Bell. 2, 199 τ. δυνατοὺς κατʼ ἰδίαν κ. τὸ πλῆθος ἐν κοινῷ συλλέγων; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 40 §170); ISm 7:2.

⑥ pert. to being distinctively characteristic of some entity, belonging to/peculiar to an individual ἕκαστον δένδρον ἐκ τ. ἰδίου καρποῦ γινώσκεται every tree is known by its own fruit Lk 6:44. τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα his (own) sheep J 10:3f. εἰς τὸν τόπον τ. ἴδιον to his own place (= the place where he belonged) Ac 1:25; cp. 20:28. The expression τοῦ ἰδίου υἱοῦ οὐκ ἐφείσατο Ro 8:32 emphasizes the extraordinary nature of God’s gift: did not spare his very own Son (Paul’s association here with the ref. to pandemic generosity, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πάντων παρέδωκεν αὐτο͂ν, contributes a semantic component to ἰ. in this pass.; for the pandemic theme see e.g. OGI 339, 29f; for donation of one’s own resources, ibid. 104; IGR 739, II, 59–62. For the term ὁ ἴδιος υἱός, but in difft. thematic contexts, see e.g. Diod S 17, 80, 1 of Parmenio; 17, 118, 1 of Antipater. In relating an instance in which a son was not spared Polyaenus 8, 13 has υἱὸς αὐτοῦ, evidently without emphasis, but Exc. 3, 7 inserts ἴδιος υἱός to emphasize the gravity of an officer’s own son violating an order.). 1 Cor 7:4ab. ἕκαστος ἐν. τ. ἰδίῳ τάγματι each one in his (own) turn 15:23 (cp. En 2:1 τ. ἰ. τάξιν). καιροὶ ἴδιοι the proper time (cp. Diod S 1, 50, 7 ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις χρόνοις; likew. 5, 80, 3; Jos., Ant. 11, 171; Ps.-Clemens, Hom. 3, 16; TestSol 6:3 ἐν καιρῷ ἰ.; Just., D. 131, 4 πρὸ τῶν ἰ. καιρῶν; Mel., P. 38, 258ff) 1 Ti 2:6; 6:15; Tit 1:3; 1 Cl 20:4; cp. 1 Ti 3:4f, 12; 4:2; 5:4. ἴδιαι λειτουργίαι … ἴδιος ὁ τόπος … ἴδιαι διακονίαι in each case proper: ministrations, … place, … services 1 Cl 40:5.—In ἰδία ἐπίλυσις 2 Pt 1:20 one’s own private interpretation is contrasted with the meaning intended by the author himself or with the interpretation of another person who is authorized or competent (s. ἐπίλυσις and WWeeda, NThSt 2, 1919, 129–35).—All these pass. are close to mng. 3; it is esp. difficult to fix the boundaries here.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

m. pasture ground for cattle ĀpṠr. I, 2, 4 ;

εὐαγγέλιον, ου, τό (s. prec. entry; Hom. et al.; LXX, TestSol D 1:13; ApcSed 14:9; Joseph., Just., Mel.) orig. ‘a reward for good news’, then simply ‘good news’ (so Plut., Sertor. 573 [11, 8]; 582 [26, 6], Phoc. 749 [16, 8]; 752 [23, 6] al.; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 93 §384; 4, 20 §78; Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 26; Jos., Bell. 2, 420; 4, 618; 656; IG III, 10 = II², 1077 [OWeinreich, ARW 18, 1915, p. 43, 3]; papyrus letter [after 238 A.D.] in Dssm., LO 313f [LAE 371]=Sb 421.—Also in sacral use: Diod S 15, 74, 2 Διονύσιος τοῖς θεοῖς εὐαγγέλια θύσας=offered a sacrifice for good news to the gods; OGI 458=IPriene 105, 40f ἦρξεν δὲ τῷ κόσμῳ τῶν διʼ αὐτὸν εὐανγελίων ἡ γενέθλιος τοῦ θεοῦ [s. AHarnack, Red. u. Aufs. I² 1906, 310ff; PWendland, ZNW 5, 1904, 335ff, D. urchristl. Literaturformen 1912, 409f]; Philostrat., Vi. Apollon. 1, 28 of the appearing of Apollon.; Ael. Aristid. 53, 3 K.=55 p. 708 D.: Ζεὺς Εὐαγγέλιος) in our lit. only in the sense of good news relating to God’s action in Jesus Christ.

① God’s good news to humans, good news as proclamation

ⓐ abs.

α. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον Mk 1:15; 8:35; 10:29; Ro 1:16; 10:16; 11:28; 1 Cor 4:15; 9:18, 23; 2 Cor 8:18; Gal 2:2; Eph 3:6; Phil 1:5; 2:22; 4:3; 1 Th 2:4; 2 Ti 1:8, 10; IPhld 5:1, 2; 8:2; 9:2; ISm 5:1; 7:2; MPol 1:1; 22:1.

β. in gen., dependent on another noun ὁ λόγος τοῦ εὐ. Ac 15:7; τὸ μυστήριον τ. εὐ. Eph 6:19; cp. vs. 15; Phil 1:7, 12, 16; ἡ ἀλήθεια τοῦ εὐ. Gal 2:5, 14; Col 1:5 (but the last passage can also be transl. the true message of the gospel). ἡ ἐλπὶς τοῦ εὐ. the hope that is kindled by the gospel vs. 23; ἡ πίστις τοῦ εὐ. faith in the gospel Phil 1:27; ἐν τ. δεσμοῖς τοῦ εὐ. Phlm 13; ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ εὐ. authority over (i.e. to proclaim) the gospel B 8:3; ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐ. beginning (of the proclaiming) of the gospel Phil 4:15; cp. 1 Cl 47:2 (s. on this WHartke, D. Sammlung u. d. ältesten Ausgaben der Paulusbriefe 1917, 55); Mk 1:1 (s. 3 below).

γ. in certain combinations w. verbs τὸ εὐ. κηρύσσειν Mt 26:13; Mk 13:10; 14:9 (JJeremias, ZNW 44, ’53, 103–7: apocalyptic proclamation); 16:15; cp. Mt 4:23; 9:35; 24:14; Mk 1:14; Ac 1:2 D; B 5:9; GMary 463, 29; 33. καταγγέλλειν 1 Cor 9:14. γνωρίζειν 15:1. εὐαγγελίζεσθαι Gal 1:11 (cp. 2 Cor 11:7).

ⓑ in combination

α. w. adj. εὐ. αἰώνιον Rv 14:6. ἕτερον 2 Cor 11:4; Gal 1:6 (EGrässer, ZTK 66, ’69, 306–44). ἅγιον AcPlCor 2:36.

β. w. gen. (s. OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft des Pls im Lichte seines Genetivgebrauchs 1924, 45–88).

א. objective genitive εὐ. τῆς βασιλείας Mt 4:23; 9:35; 24:14. τ. θεοῦ Mk 1:14. τ. χάριτος τ. θεοῦ of God’s grace Ac 20:24. τ. εἰρήνης Eph 6:15. τ. σωτηρίας 1:13. τ. δόξης τ. Χριστοῦ of the glory of Christ 2 Cor 4:4; cp. 1 Ti 1:11 (τὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εὐ. Orig., C. Cels. 2, 13, 62). εὐ. τ. Χριστοῦ is usu. interpr. as the gospel ( good news) about Christ (because of Ro 1:1–3; 2 Cor 4:4; 1 Th 3:2, cp. Ro 15:16) Ro 15:19; 1 Cor 9:12; 2 Cor 2:12 (here and Ro 1:1 εἰς εὐαγγέλιον=for the purpose of bringing the good news, as Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 113 §474). 2 Cor 9:13; 10:14; Gal 1:7; Phil 1:27; 1 Th 3:2; cp. Ro 1:9; 2 Th 1:8; B 5:9; MPol 19:1. εὐ. τῆς ἀκροβυστίας the gospel for the uncircumcised Gal 2:7.

ב. Subjective genitive (τοῦ) θεοῦ Ro 1:1; 15:16; 2 Cor 11:7; 1 Th 2:2, 8, 9; 1 Pt 4:17. The one who is commissioned to do the proclaiming can be mentioned in the subj. gen. εὐ. μου, ἡμῶν Ro 2:16; 16:25; 2 Cor 4:3; 1 Th 1:5; 2 Th 2:14; 2 Ti 2:8. S. LBaudiment, ‘L’Évangile’ de St. Paul 1925; Molland (3 below) 83–97.

② details relating to the life and ministry of Jesus, good news of Jesus D 8:2; 11:3; 15:3f; 2 Cl 8:5; MPol 4:1; perh. also Mk 1:1 (LKeck, The Introduction to Mark’s Gospel, NTS 12, ’66, 352–70; DDormeyer, NTS 33, ’87, 452–68); IPhld 8:2; ISm 7:2. This usage marks a transition to

③ a book dealing with the life and teaching of Jesus, a gospel account that deals w. the life and teaching of Jesus (Just., A I, 66, 3 al.) Dg 11:6 (ἐν τοῖς εὐ.; TestSol 1:13 D; Orig., C. Cels. 1:9, 19 [w. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις]) τὸ καθʼ Ἐβραίους εὐ.—Papias (2:17).—(Cp. ὁ τὸ εὐ. γράψας Ἰωάννης Orig., C. Cels. 5, 12, 13).—ASeeberg, D. Evangelium Christi 1905; Harnack, Entstehg. u. Entwicklg. d. Kirchenverfassung 1910, 199–239; PZondervan, Het woord ‘Evangelium’: TT 48, 1914, 187–213; MBurrows, The Origin of the Word ‘Gospel’: JBL 44, 1925, 21–33; JSchniewind, Euangelion 1; 2; 1927, ’31, Die Begriffe Wort u. Evglm. b. Pls, diss. Halle 1910; AFridrichsen, Τὸ εὐαγγέλιον hos Pls: NorTT 13, 1912, 153–70; 209–56, Der Begriff Evgl. b. Irenäus, Hippolyt, Novatian: ibid. 1917, 148–70; AOepke, D. Missionspredigt des Ap. Pls. 1920, 50ff; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 422f; EMolland, D. Paulin. Euangelion; D. Wort u. d. Sache ’34; RAsting, D. Verkündigung im Urchristentum ’39 (on Word of God, Gospel, Witness); GFriedrich, TW II 705–35; KRengstorf, ZNW 31, ’32, 54–56; MAlbertz, D. Botschaft des NT, vols. I and II, ’47–’57; JvDodewaard, Biblica 35, ’54, 160–73; HKoester, TU 65, ’57, 6–12; JBowman, ‘Gospel’ and Its Cognates in Palestinian Syriac, NT Essays (TManson memorial), ed. Higgins ’59, 54–67; HFrankemölle, Evangelium ’88; HKoester, From the Kerygma to the Written Gospels: NTS 35, ’89, 361–81; RAC VI 1107–60.—DELG s.v. ἄγγελος. M-M. On εὐαγγελ- terms s. New Docs 3, 12–14. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

μαρτυρέω impf. ἐμαρτύρουν; fut. μαρτυρήσω; 1 aor. ἐμαρτύρησα; pf. μεμαρτύρηκα. Pass.: impf. ἐμαρτυρούμην; 1 aor. ἐμαρτυρήθην Hb 11:2, 4, 39; pf. μεμαρτύρημαι (s. four next entries; Semonides, Hdt.+)

① to confirm or attest someth. on the basis of personal knowledge or belief, bear witness, be a witness.

ⓐ to offer testimony

α. act. ὑμεῖς μαρτυρεῖτε you are witnesses J 15:27. ἐὰν θέλωσιν μαρτυρεῖν if they are willing to appear as witnesses Ac 26:5.—J 12:17; 1J 5:6f. Parenthetically, emphasizing the correctness of a statement, μαρτυρῶ I can testify (POxy 105, 13 Σαραπίων μαρτυρῶ=‘I, S., am witness’; PLond III, 1164 [f], 35 al. p. 162.—B-D-F §465, 2; Rob. 434) 2 Cor 8:3. περί τινος bear witness, testify concerning someone or someth. (PGrenf II, 73, 16 ὅταν ἔλθῃ σὺν θεῷ, μαρτυρήσει σοι περὶ ὧν αὐτὴν πεποιήκασιν; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 217, Vi. 259) J 1:7f, 15 (in the very likely case that μαρτυρεῖ refers to the past, cp. Caecil. Calact., Fgm. 75 p. 58, 2ff, where examples are given of the interchange of tenses: Demosth. 59, 34 τοὺς ὁρῶντας for τ. ἑωρακότας; Eur., Androm. Fgm. 145 Nauck² ὁρῶ ἀντὶ τοῦ εἶδον; Thu. 2, 35, 1 ἐπαινοῦσι ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐπῄνεσαν); 2:25; 5:31, 32a, 36f, 39; 7:7; 8:13f, 18ab; 10:25; 15:26; 21:24; 1J 5:9. μαρτύρησον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ testify to the wrong J 18:23 (μ.=furnish proof X., Symp. 8, 12). Also ἐπί τινι Hb 11:4b (on ἐπί w. dat. in this pass. s. Gen 4:4). W. dat. of thing (Jos., Ant. 12, 135; Ath. 16, 3 τῷ λόγω. Πλάτων) μ. τῇ ἀληθείᾳ bear witness to the truth J 5:33; 18:37. μ. σου τῇ ἀληθείᾳ testify to the truth of your (way of life) 3J 3; σου τῇ ἀγάπῃ vs. 6. W. dat. of pers. about whom testimony is given (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 73 §298; Just., D. 122, 2.—It is dat. of advantage or disadv.) Ac 10:43; 22:5; GJs 15:2; w. ptc. foll. (μ. Ἰακὼβ λέγων Did., Gen. 221, 2) θεὸς ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς δοὺς κτλ. God testified for them by giving Ac 15:8 (though αὐτοῖς can also be taken w. δούς); w. ὅτι foll. bear someone witness that J 3:28; Ro 10:2; Gal 4:15; Col 4:13. μ. ἑαυτῷ, ὅτι bear witness to oneself that Mt 23:31. The dat. can also designate the pers. who is informed or instructed by the testimony: bear witness to someone Hb 10:15; Rv 22:18.—μ. ὅτι testify that (Aelian, VH 9, 11; Did., Gen. 156, 28) J 1:34; 4:44; 12:17 v.l.; 1J 4:14. ὅτι introducing direct discourse J 4:39. μ. κατὰ τ. θεοῦ ὅτι bear witness against God by declaring that 1 Cor 15:15 (PPetr II, 21 [d], 12 [III B.C.] καθʼ οὗ μαρτυρῶ). ἐμαρτύρησεν καὶ εἶπεν w. direct discourse foll. J 13:21. μ. λέγων w. direct disc. foll. J 1:32. Of God μοι μαρτυρεῖ λέγων (Ps 89:4 follows) he testifies (of it) to me by saying 15:4. For 1 Ti 6:13 s. c below.

β. pass., be witnessed, have witness borne ὑπό τινος by someone (Philo, Leg. All. 3, 46 σοφία μαρτυρουμένη ὑπὸ θεοῦ; Just., D. 63, 5 Χριστὸς ὑπὸ τοῦ ταῦτα ποιήσαντος μαρτυρούμενος. Of Jesus: ὑπὸ τῶν προφητῶν πολλαχοῦ μεμαρτ. Orig., C. Cels. 2, 9, 30) Ro 3:21 (the witness of the law and prophets points to God’s righteousness). Foll. by ὅτι and a quot. in direct discourse Hb 7:17. μαρτυρούμενος ὅτι ζῇ one of whom it is testified that he lives vs. 8.

ⓑ to confirm bear witness to, declare, confirm, act. (Eunap., Vi. Soph. p. 76 ὁ θεὸς ἐμαρτύρησε; Iren. 2, 22, 5 [Harv I 331, 1]) τὶ someth. (Demosth. 57, 4 ἀκοήν; Aeschin. 1, 46 τἀληθῆ). ὸ̔ ἑωράκαμεν μαρτυροῦμεν J 3:11; cp. vs. 32. τὸν λόγον τ. θεοῦ Rv 1:2. ταῦτα 22:20. τινί τὶ someth. to or for someone (Dionys. Hal. 3, 67, 1; Jos., Ant. 6, 355) vs. 16. ὑμῖν τ. ζωήν 1J 1:2. The acc. is to be supplied fr. the context J 19:35; Ac 23:11. W. ptc. ἀκούσαντες μαρτυρήσωσιν they must admit that they have heard PtK 3 p. 15, 23.—μαρτυρίαν μ. bear witness, confirm, attest (Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 399b; Epict. 4, 8, 32) περί τινος concerning someone J 5:32b; 1J 5:10 (POxy 3313, 25f μαρτυρήσει σοι Σαραπᾶς περὶ τῶν ῥόδων S. will confirm to you about the roses).

ⓒ to support one’s testimony with total selfgiving, eccl. usage w. regard to martyrdom bear witness, testify, be a witness (unto death), be martyred, act. (TestAbr B 11 p. 115, 16 [Stone p. 787] Ἄβελ ὁ ἐν πρώτοις μαρτυρήσας; Mel., HE 4, 26, 3; τοῖς μαρτυρούσι τῷ χριστιανισμῷ μέχρι θανάτου Orig., C. Cels. 1, 8, 2): of Paul μαρτυρήσας ἐπὶ τῶν ἡγουμένων … εἰς τὸν ἅγιον τόπον ἐπορεύθη 1 Cl 5:7; cp. vs. 4; MPol 1:1; 19:1; 21f (Iren. 3, 3, 4 [Harv. II 12, 8]); EpilMosq 4. Prob. 1 Ti 6:13 also belongs here: Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ μαρτυρήσαντος ἐπὶ Ποντίου Πιλάτου τ. καλὴν ὁμολογίαν Christ Jesus, who made the good confession before Pontius Pilate (s. GBaldensperger, RHPR 2, 1922, 1–25; 95–117); otherwise the passage may be classed under a above.

② to affirm in a supportive manner, testify favorably, speak well (of), approve

ⓐ act. (Dio Chrys. 23 [40], 19; SIG 374, 37 [III B.C.]; POxy 930, 16) w. dat. of the pers. (Appian, Samn. 11, §2 τοῖς ὑπάτοις, Liby. 105 §495, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §387; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jos., Ant. 12, 134) or of the thing approved Lk 4:22 (OFearghus, ZNW 75, ’84, 60–72 [pap and ins]; JNolland, JBL 98, ’79, 219–29); J 3:26. Of God toward David Ac 13:22. μὴ ἑαυτῷ μαρτυρείτω he must not testify (favorably) concerning himself 1 Cl 38:2. W. dat. to be supplied 3J 12b. μαρτυρίᾳ, ᾗ ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτῷ ὁ δεσπότης Hs 5, 2, 6. Of the flesh ἵνα τὸ πνεῦμα … μαρτυρήσῃ αὐτῇ Hs 5, 7, 1.—ὁ κύριος ὁ μαρτυρῶν ἐπὶ (which a v.l. omits; μ. ἐπί τινι as Jos., Ant. 3, 189) τῷ λόγῳ τ. χάριτος αὐτοῦ the Lord, who attested the word of his grace Ac 14:3. With συνευδοκέω Lk 11:48 v.l.

ⓑ pass., be well spoken of, be approved (Ep. 12 of Apollonius of Tyana: Philostrat. I 348, 26; Just., D. 29, 1. Exx. fr. ins in Dssm., NB 93 [BS 265], LO 69, 2 [LAE 84, 5]) ἀνὴρ μαρτυρούμενος or μεμαρτυρημένος a man of good reputation Ac 6:3; IPhld 11:1. Of OT worthies people of attested merit 1 Cl 17:1; 19:1. Of David 18:1. Of Abraham μεγάλως ἐμαρτυρήθη his merit was gloriously attested 17:2 (cp. Just., D. 11, 5 ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει μαρτυηθέντος ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ). Of the apostles 47:4. Of Paul IEph 12:2. Of church leaders 1 Cl 44:3.—Foll. by nom. and inf. Hb 11:4a; cp. vs. 5. διά τινος be praised for someth. 11:4a, 39. ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς μαρτυρούμενος well attested in good deeds 1 Ti 5:10; cp. Hb 11:2. ὑπό τινος be well spoken of by someone (M. Ant. 7, 62; SIG 799, 28; Jos., Ant. 3, 59; Just., D. 29, 3; 92, 4; New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 10 of a benefactor) Ac 10:22; 16:2; 22:12; IPhld 5:2.—Impersonally μαρτυρεῖταί τινι ὑπό τινος a good testimony is given by someone to someone (Dionys. Hal., Thu. 8 μαρτυρεῖται τῷ ἀνδρὶ τάχα μὲν ὐπὸ πάντων φιλοσόφων; BGU 1141, 15 [14 B.C.] ὡς καὶ μαρτυρηθήσεταί σοι ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων) Δημητρίῳ μεμαρτύρηται ὑπὸ πάντων καὶ ὑπὸ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας Demetrius has received a good testimony from everyone and from the truth itself 3J 12a.—Dg 12:6.—OMichel, Bibl. Bekennen u. Bezeugen, Ὁμολογεῖν und μαρτυρεῖν im bibl. Sprachgebr.: Evang. Theologie 2, ’35, 231–45; EBurnier, La notion de témoignage dans le NT ’39.—DELG s.v. μάρτυς. M-M. EDNT. TRE XXII 196–212. TW.

μέρος, ους, τό (Pind., Hdt.+).

① part, in contrast to the whole

ⓐ gener. (Ocellus Luc. c. 12 τὸ πᾶν ἢ μέρος τι τοῦ παντός; Alex. Aphr., An. II 1 p. 13, 16 μ. ἐν ὅλῳ; Gen 47:24; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 189 τ. ὅλου κ. τῶν μερῶν al.; Ath. 12, 3 μικρῷ μέρει τοῦ παντὸς τὸ πᾶν … δοκιμάζουσιν) w. the gen. of the whole τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μ. τῆς οὐσίας the part of the property that falls to me Lk 15:12 (SIG 346, 36 τὸ μέρος τὸ ἐπιβάλλον; 1106, 80). μ. τι τοῦ ἀγροῦ a part of the field Hs 5, 2, 2. δύο μέρη τῆς ῥάβδου two thirds of the stick (Thu. 1, 104, 2 τῆς Μέμφιδος τῶν δύο μερῶν πρὸς τὸ τρίτον μέρος; SIG 975, 24f) Hs 8, 1, 12f; cp. 8, 5, 3ff; 8, 8, 4; 8, 9, 1. τὸ πλεῖστον μ. αὐτῶν 8, 2, 9; cp. 9, 7, 4 and 8, 1, 16. τὰ λοιπὰ μ. 8, 1, 15. Also without gen., when it is plain fr. the context how much of a contrast betw. part and whole is involved μὴ ἔχον μέρος τι σκοτεινόν with no dark part Lk 11:36; cp. J 19:23 (Jos., Ant. 1, 172 μέρη τέσσαρα ποιήσαντες); Ac 5:2; Rv 16:19; Hv 4, 3, 4f. Of the Christians ἐκλογῆς μ. a chosen portion fr. among all humankind 1 Cl 29:1.

ⓑ specialized uses

α. component, element τινὰ μέρη ἔχουσιν τ. ἀνομίας they still have certain elements of lawlessness Hv 3, 6, 4b.

β. of parts of the body (Diod S 32, 12, 1 τὰ τοῦ σώματος μέρη; Dio Chrys. 16 [33], 62; Plut., Mor. 38a μ. τ. σώματος; Artem. 3, 51 al.; Herodian 8, 4, 10; PRyl 145, 14 [38 A.D.]; PGM 4, 2390; 2392; Tat. 16, 1) fig., of the body whose head is Christ Eph 4:16 (on the text s. μέλος 2; for the idea σῶμα, end).

γ. τὰ μέρη the parts (of a geographical area), region, district (Herodian 6, 5, 7; Jos., Ant. 12, 234; B-D-F §141, 2; s. Rob. 408) τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 2:22. τὰ μ. τῆς Λιβύης τῆς κατὰ Κυρήνην Ac 2:10; cp. 20:2. Also of a district in or around a city (cp. UPZ 180b, 8 [113 B.C.] οἰκίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου μέρει Διὸς πόλεως) τὰ μ. Τύρου καὶ Σιδῶνος the district of Tyre and Sidon Mt 15:21; cp. 16:13; Mk 8:10; J 6:1 D; Ac 7:43 D. τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη the upper (=inland) regions, interior (cp. PHamb 54 I, 14 τὰ ἄνω μέρη of the upper Nile valley) Ac 19:1.—Eph 4:9 (s. κατώτερος).

δ. side (Diod S 2, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ἑκάτερον μέρος=on both sides; Ex 32:15; 1 Macc 9:12; TestJud 5:4; Ath. 1, 4 τὸ ἕτερον … τῆς κεφαλῆς μέρος) Hs 9, 2, 3. τὰ δεξιὰ μ. on the right side, τὰ ἀριστερὰ μ. on the left side v 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1. Of a vessel τὰ δεξιὰ μ. τοῦ πλοίου the right side of the boat (as the lucky side? cp. Il. 12, 239; 13, 821 of a bird of omen) J 21:6 (of a body part POxy 3195, II 40, 43 [331 A.D.]). τὰ ἐξώτερα μ. τῆς οἰκοδομῆς the outside of the building Hs 9, 9, 3.—New Docs 3, 75.

ε. piece ἰχθύος ὀπτοῦ μέρος a piece of broiled fish Lk 24:42.—μ. τι λαμβάνειν take a portion Hv 3, 1, 6.

ζ. party (Jos., Bell. 1, 143; POxy 1278, 24; PFlor 47, 17; PLond III, 1028, 18 p. 277 [VII A.D.] τοῦ πρασίνου μέρους=‘of the green party’) Ac 23:6. τινὲς τ. γραμματέων τ. μέρους τ. Φαρισαίων vs. 9.

η. branch or line of business (cp. PFlor 89, 2 after Preisigke, Berichtigungsliste 1922, 147 τὰ μέρη τῆς διοικήσεως=‘the branches of the administration’) Ac 19:27.

θ. matter, affair (Menand., Epitr. 234 S. [58 Kö.], Per. 297 S. [107 Kö.]; Diod S 2, 27, 1; Περὶ ὕψους 12, 5 [μέρη=objects]; Jos., Ant. 15, 61 τούτῳ τῷ μέρει; PRyl 127, 12 [29 A.D.] ἀναζητῆσαι ὑπὲρ τοῦ μέρους=‘begin an investigation concerning the matter’) ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει in this case, in this matter (cp. Polyb. 18, 18, 2 τ. πίστιν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει διαφυλάττειν) 2 Cor 3:10; 9:3 (s. also ἐν μέρει in c below). Cp. 1 Pt 4:16 v.l.

ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἀνὰ μέρος one after the other, in succession (s. ἀνά 2) 1 Cor 14:27.—ἀπὸ μέρους in part (Dio Chrys. 28 [45], 3; Ael. Aristid. 32, 4 K.=12 p. 135 D.; Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 10, 2; Epict. 1, 27, 17 διʼ ὅλων ἢ ἀ. μ.; PRyl 133, 17; BGU 1201, 15 [2 A.D.]; PTebt 402, 2; POxy 1681, 9; Just., A II, 10, 8 Χριστῷ … τῷ … ἄ. μ. γνωσθέντι) πώρωσις ἀ. μ. a partial hardening Ro 11:25. τολμηρότερον … ἀ. μ. very boldly on some points 15:15. καθὼς ἐπέγνωτε ἡμᾶς ἀ. μ. as you have understood us in part 2 Cor 1:14. Also for a while: ἀ. μ. ἐμπλησθῆναί τινος enjoy someone’s company for a while Ro 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 2:5 in some degree.—ἐκ μέρους in part, individually (Ael. Aristid. 54 p. 695 D.; 698; SIG 852, 30 … ὅλη, ἐκ μέρους δέ … ; PLond III, 1166, 14 p. 105 [42 A.D.]; BGU 538, 33; PRyl 233, 6; Philo, Mos. 2, 1 al.) individually 1 Cor 12:27. ἐκ μ. γινώσκειν know in part 13:9a, 12; cp. vs. 9b. τὸ ἐκ μ. what is ‘ in part’ = imperfect vs. 10.—ἐν μέρει in the matter of, with regard to (Antig. Car. 24; Diod S 20, 58, 5; Plut., Mor. 102e; Horapollo 1, 57 ἐν τροφῆς μέρει=‘as food’; GDI 5185, 30 [Crete] ἐν χάριτος μέρει; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 5 ἐν μέρει λόγου al.) ἐν μέρει ἑορτῆς with regard to a festival Col 2:16 (cp. ApcrEzk [Epiph. 70, 14] ἐν τῷ μέρει τῆς ἀδυναμίας ‘in connection with my disability’. See bθ above).—κατὰ μέρος part by part, in detail (ins [s. SIG ind. IV p. 444a]; PTebt 6, 24) περὶ ὧν οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν κατὰ μέρος (κ. μ. of the detailed treatment of a subj. as Pla., Theaet. 157b, Soph. 246c; Polyb. 1, 4, 6; 3, 19, 11; 3, 28, 4; 10, 27, 7 λέγειν κ. μ.; Ptolem., Apotel. 2, 11, 7; 2 Macc 2:30; Jos., Ant. 12, 245) point by point Hb 9:5.—παρὰ μέρος to one side (Appian, Liby. 14 §55 γιγνόμενος παρὰ μ.=going to one side, Bell. Civ. 5, 81 §345; PGM 13, 438 βάλε παρὰ μέρος=‘put to one side’) ὁ λίθος ὑπεχώρησε παρὰ μ. the stone went back to one side GPt 9:37.

ⓓ as adv. acc. μέρος τι in part, partly (Thu. 2, 64; 4, 30, 1; X., Eq. 1, 12; SIG 976, 65; 1240, 8 ἤτι μέρος ἢ σύμπαν; 3 Km 12:31) 1 Cor 11:18; τὸ πλεῖστον μ. for the most part (Menand., Fgm. 789 Kö.; Diod S 22, 10, 5) Hs 8, 5, 6; 8, 10, 1. τὸ πλεῖον μ. for the greater part v 3, 6, 4a.

② share (Trag. et al.) μ. τι μεταδοῦναι ἀπό τινος give a share of someth. 1:5 (on μέρος ἀπό τινος cp. PStras 19, 5 [105 A.D.] τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ μέρους ἑνὸς ἀπὸ μερῶν ἐννέα) δώσω αὐτοῖς … μέρος δικαιοσύνης μετὰ τῶν ἁγίων μου I will give them … a share of uprightness with my holy ones i.e. those rescued from perdition will enjoy the same redeemed status as those who are already in the divine presence ApcPt Rainer 6. ἔχειν μ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. (cp. Synes., Ep. 58 p. 203a οὐκ ἔστι τῷ διαβόλῳ μέρος ἐν παραδείσῳ) Rv 20:6 (Dalman, Worte 103f). ἀφελεῖ ὁ θεὸς τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου τῆς ζωῆς 22:19.— Place (Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 34 §154 ἐν ὑπηκόων ἀντὶ κοινωνῶν εἶναι μέρει=to be in the place of subjects instead of partners) τὸ μ. αὐτῶν ἐν τ. λίμνῃ their place is in the lake Rv 21:8. ἔχειν μ. μετά τινος have a place with someone J 13:8. τὸ μ. τινὸς μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν τιθέναι assign someone a place among the dissemblers (hypocrites) Mt 24:51; cp. Lk 12:46. μετʼ αὐτῶν μοι τὸ μ. γένοιτο σχεῖν ἐν (v.l. παρὰ) θεῷ may I have my place with them in (or with) God IPol 6:1. τοῦ λαβεῖν μ. ἐν ἀριθμῷ τῶν μαρτύρων MPol 14:2.—B. 934. DELG s.v. μείρομαι II. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

νέος, α, ον (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, TestSol; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 27 [Stone p. 4]; Test12Patr; JosAs 29:11 cod. A [p. 85, 15 Bat. comp.]; ApcEsdr 5:5 p. 29, 29 Tdf.; ApcSed 16:2; AscIs 3:3 [comp.]; Philo, Joseph.; apolog. exc. Ar.) comp. νεώτερος.

① pert. to being in existence but a relatively short time, new, fresh

ⓐ of things ν. φύραμα fresh dough w. no leaven in it; symbolically of Christians 1 Cor 5:7 (s. φύραμα, ζύμη). Also ν. ζύμη of Christ IMg 10:2. οἶνος ν. new wine (Simonides 49 D.; Diocles 141 p. 184, 14; POxy 729, 19; 92, 2; 3; Sir 9:10), which is still fermenting Mt 9:17; Mk 2:22; Lk 5:37f; (opp. παλαιὸς οἶ. old, aged wine: schol. on Pind., O. 9, 74f [49]) vs. 39.—HImmerwahr, New Wine in Ancient Wineskins: Hesperia 61, ’92, 121–32.

ⓑ fig., of Christ πάντοτε νέος ἐν ἁγίων καρδίαις γεννώμενος he is ever born anew in the hearts of God’s people Dg 11:4 (Diod S 3, 62, 6 of Dionysus, who was torn to pieces but later joined together again by Demeter: ἐξ ἀρχῆς νέον γεννηθῆναι).

② pert. to being superior in quality or state to what went before, new of pers. ἐνδύσασθαι τὸν ν. (ἄνθρωπον) put on the new person Col 3:10. διαθήκη ν. the new covenant (διαθήκη 2; λόγος Mel., P. 6, 44) Hb 12:24.

③ pert. to being in the early stages of life, young

ⓐ as adj.

α. positive (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 136 §566 νέος ἀνήρ; PsSol 2:8; 17:11; Philo, Post. Cai. 109; Jos., Ant. 8, 23; Jerus. ins: SEG VIII, 209 [I A.D.]) ὁλοτελῶς νέον εἶναι be completely young Hv 3, 13, 4. Also of animals μόσχος νέος a young ox or calf 1 Cl 52:2 (Ps 68:32).

β. mostly comp.: ὁ νεώτερος υἱός the younger son (Gen 27:15; cp. Philo, Sacr. Abel. 42; Jos., Ant. 12, 235, in all these pass. in contrast to πρεσβύτερος as Lk 15:25) Lk 15:13; cp. vs. 12; 13:5 (Gen 48:14). τὴν ὄψιν νεωτέραν ἔχειν have a more youthful face Hv 3, 10, 4; 3, 12, 1. ὡσεὶ νεώτερος ἐγεγόνειν I felt young again Hs 9, 11, 5. On the other hand, the comp. sense is scarcely felt any longer 3, 10, 5; 3, 13, 1. Likew. in νεώτεραι χῆραι 1 Ti 5:11; cp. vs. 14, where the noun is to be supplied fr. context. Sim. J 21:18 (cp. Ps 36:25).

ⓑ as subst.

α. positive (οἱ) νέοι the young people (X., Cyr. 5, 1, 25; Diod S 14, 115, 3; 2 Macc 5:13; 6:28; 15:17; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 206; Just., A I, 54, 1; Tat. 32, 2; Ath. 34, 1; on the non-technical sense s. CForbes, NEOI ’33, 5 n. 17) w. οἱ πρεσβύτεροι (s. πρεσβύτερος 1a) 1 Cl 1:3; 3:3; 21:6. σκοπὸν πᾶσι τοῖς νέοις τιθέναι set a goal for all the young people 2 Cl 19:1 (οἱ νέοι for young people of both sexes: Nicetas Eugen. 8, 187 H.). AcPl Ox 6, 23 (restored=Aa 1, 242, 2)—αἱ νέαι the young women Tit 2:4.

β. comp., mostly with little comp. force (POxy 298, 29; TestSol 1:2 L, 3 L, 4 L; Jos., Ant. 15, 407): οἱ νεώτεροι young men (Diod S 14, 113, 3 [alternating with οἱ νέοι, and with no difference in mng. 14, 115, 3, as 18, 46, 3 οἱ πρεσβύτεροι … οἱ νεώτεροι beside 4 οἱ πρεσβύτεροι … οἱ νέοι]; 2 Macc 5:24; Just., D. 131, 6; MartIs 3:3 [Denis p. 112, Amh.] sg.) Ac 5:6; 1 Ti 5:1 (s. on πρεσβύτερος 1a); Tit 2:6; Pol 5:3. Opp. πρεσβύτεροι 1 Pt 5:5 (X., An. 7, 4, 5; Timaeus Hist.: 566 Fgm. 11a Jac. διακονεῖν τοὺς νεωτέρους τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις; Dio Chrys. 78 [29], 21; Demosth., Ep. 2, 10; EpArist 14; Philo, Spec. Leg. 2, 226; Jos., Ant. 3, 47; PParis 66, 24 πρεσβύτεροι καὶ ἀδύνατοι καὶ νεώτεροι; Plut., Mor. 486 F. On the other hand, also the ins of Ptolemais APF 1, 1901, 202 no. 4, 15 οἱ νεώτεροι καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πολῖται. On νεώτεροι as t.t. s. Forbes, [α above] 60f; Schürer III 103). (αἱ) νεώτεραι young(er) women 1 Ti 5:2.—ὁ νεώτερος beside ὁ μείζων Lk 22:26 has the force of a superlative (cp. Gen 42:20); this is influenced by the consideration that the youngest was obliged to perform the lowliest service (cp. Ac 5:6).

④ a person beginning to experience someth., novice, subst. νέοι ἐν τῇ πίστει Hv 3, 5, 4.

⑤ The well-known city name (quotable Hdt.et al.) is prob. to be written Νέα πόλις (cp. SIG 107, 35 [410/409 B.C.] ἐν Νέαι πόληι; Meisterhans³-Schw. p. 137; PWarr 5, 8 [154 A.D.]; Diod S 20, 17, 1 Νέαν πόλιν; 20, 44, 1 ἐν Νέᾳ πόλει; Jos., Bell. 4, 449. Even in 247 A.D. τῆς Νέας πόλεως is found in pap [PViereck, Her 27, 1892, 516 II, 29f]; W-S. §5, 7i; Mlt-H. 278; Hemer, Acts 113) acc. Νέαν πόλιν Ac 16:11 (v.l. Νεάπολιν); IPol 8:1 (where, nevertheless, Νεάπολιν is attested and customarily printed). In both places our lit. means by Neapolis (New City, mod. Kavala) the harbor of Philippi in Macedonia (Ptolem. 3, 13; Strabo 7, Fgm. 36 p. 331; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 106 §446; Pliny, NH 4, 42 p. 58 Detl.; s. PECS 614; PCollart, Philippes ’37, 102–32, esp. p. 104).—RHarrisville s.v. καινός; Kl. Pauly IV 29f; B. 957f. Schhmidt, Syn. II 94–123 (Syn. of καινός). DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

τέλος, ους, τό (Hom.+)

① a point of time marking the end of a duration, end, termination, cessation (Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130 §139 Jac. τέλος τ. Βίου Καίσαρος; TestAbr A 1 p. 78, 5 [Stone p. 4] τῆς ζωῆς; Maximus Tyr. 13, 9d ἀπιστίας) τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔσται τέλος Lk 1:33. μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων Hb 7:3. τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου the end of the fading (splendor) 2 Cor 3:13. τέλος νόμου Χριστός Ro 10:4 (perh. 3 below). πάντων τὸ τέλος ἤγγικεν the end of all things is near 1 Pt 4:7. τὸ τ. Ἰερουσαλήμ GPt 7:25. τὸ τέλος κυρίου Js 5:11 is oft. (fr. Augustine to ABischoff, ZNW 7, 1906, 274–79) incorrectly taken to mean the end=the death (this is what τέλος means e.g. TestAbr A 4, p. 81, 14 [Stone p. 10]; Appian, Syr. 64 §342, Bell. Civ. 1, 107 §501; 3, 98 §408; Arrian, Anab. 3, 22, 2; 7, 24, 1) of the Lord Jesus (s. 3 below). τ̣ὸ̣ [τέλο]ς (or τ̣ε̣[λο]ς) τῶν φαινο[με]νων (Till’s rdg. of Ox 1081, 29f after the Coptic SJCh 90, 6, in place of τ̣ὸ̣ [φῶ]ς τῶν φαινο[μέ]νων) the end of the things that are apparent. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (X., An. 6, 5, 2; Pla., Phdr. 241d, Rep. 3, 392c; Diod S 14, 18, 8; 16, 91, 2) Mk 3:26 (opp. στῆναι). The possibility of repenting ἔχει τέλος is at an end Hv 2, 2, 5. Of the consummation that comes to prophecies when they are fulfilled (Xenophon Eph. 5, 1, 13; Jos., Ant. 2, 73; 4, 125; 10, 35; SibOr 3, 211): revelations Hv 3, 3, 2. So perh. τὸ περὶ ἐμοῦ τέλος ἔχει the references (in the Scriptures) to me are being fulfilled Lk 22:37; also prob. is my life’s work is at an end (cp. Diod S 20, 95, 1 τέλος ἔχειν of siege-machines, the construction of which entailed a great deal of hard work: be completed; Plut., Mor. 615e; Jos., Vi. 154).

② the last part of a process, close, conclusion, esp. of the last things, the final act in the cosmic drama (Sb 8422, 10 [7 B.C.] τοῦτο γάρ ἐστι τέλος; TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 19 [Stone p. 32] τῆς κρίσεως ἐκείνης τὸ τέλος; ApcEsdr 3:13 ἐγγύς ἐστιν τὸ τέλος; Iren., 1, 10, 3 [Harv. I 96, 8] περὶ τοῦ τ. καὶ τῶν μέλλόντων)

ⓐ Mt 24:6, 14; Mk 13:7; Lk 21:9; PtK 2 p. 13, 22. Perh. 1 Cor 15:24, if ἔσται is to be supplied w. εἶτα τὸ τέλος then the end will come (so JHéring, RHPR 12, ’33, 300–320; s. below, bα and 4). ἔχει τέλος the end is here Hv 3, 8, 9. On τὰ τέλη τῶν αἰώνων 1 Cor 10:11 s. αἰών 2b and 5 below; also MBogle, ET 67, ’56, 246f: τ.=‘mystery’.—PVolz, D. Eschatologie d. jüd. Gemeinde im ntl. Zeitalter ’34; Bousset, Rel.³ 202–301; EHaupt, Die eschatol. Aussagen Jesu in den synopt. Evangelien 1895; HSharman, The Teaching of Jesus about the Future acc. to the Synopt. Gospels 1909; FSpitta, Die grosse eschatol. Rede Jesu: StKr 82, 1909, 348–401; EvDobschütz, The Eschatology of the Gospels 1910, Zur Eschatol. der Ev.: StKr 84, 1911, 1–20; PCorssen, Das apokalypt. Flugblatt in der synopt. überl.: Wochenschr. für klass. Philol. 32, 1915, nos. 30f; 33f; DVölter, Die eschat. Rede Jesu: SchTZ 32, 1915, 180–202; KWeiss (s. τελέω 1); JWeiss, Das Urchristent. 1917, 60–98; JJeremias, Jesus als Weltvollender 1930; WKümmel, Die Eschatologie der Ev.: ThBl 15, ’36, 225–41, Verheissg. u. Erfüllg. ’45; CCadoux, The Historic Mission of Jesus ’41 (eschat. of the synoptics); HPreisker, Das Ethos des Urchristentums ’49; AStrobel, Untersuchungen zum eschat. Verzögerungsproblem, ’61. Billerb. IV 799–976. S. also ἀνάστασις 2b, end.—In contrast to ἀρχή: B 1:6ab; IEph 14:1ab; IMg 13:1. Of God Rv 1:8 v.l.; 21:6; 22:13 (Ar. 4, 2; Just., D. 7, 2; Mel., P. 105, 113f; s. also ἀρχή 2).

ⓑ adverbial expressions

α. adv. acc. τὸ τέλος finally (Pla. et al.; BGU 1024 VII, 23; B-D-F §160; s. Rob. 486–88; Theoph. Ant. 1, 14 [p. 92, 8].—The customary use in this case is τέλος without the art.: ViAm 1 [p. 81, 11 Sch.]) 1 Pt 3:8. εἶτα τὸ τέλος 1 Cor 15:24 is classed here by Hofmann²; FBurkitt, JTS 17, 1916, 384f; KBarth, Die Auferstehung der Toten² 1926, 96 (s. 2a above and 4 below).

β. to the end, to the last: ἄχρι τέλους Hb 6:11; Rv 2:26; ἕως τέλους (Da 6:27 Theod.; JosAs 12:3) 1 Cor 1:8; 2 Cor 1:13 (here, too, it means to the end=until the parousia [Windisch, Sickenberger, NRSV] rather than ‘fully’ [Ltzm., Hdb.; RSV ’46]); Hs 9, 27, 3; μέχρι τέλους (Phocylides [VI B.C.] 17 Diehl³ ἐξ ἀρχῆς μέχρι τέλους; Chariton 4, 7, 8; Appian, Mithrid. 112 §550; Polyaenus 4, 6, 11; POxy 416, 3; PTebt 420, 18; Wsd 16:5; 19:1; Jos., Vi. 406) Hb 3:6 v.l., 14; Dg 10:7. S. also εἰς τέλος (γ below).

γ. εἰς τέλος in the end, finally (Hdt. 3, 40 et al.; PTebt 38, 11 [113 B.C.]; 49, 12; Gen 46:4; GrBar 13:2; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 18, 2) Lk 18:5. σωθῆναι 2 Cl 19:3.—To the end, until the end (Epict. 1, 7, 17; Jos., Ant. 19, 96; JosAs 23:5) Mt 10:22; 24:13; Mk 13:13; IEph 14:2; IRo 10:3.—Forever, through all eternity (Dionys. Hal. 13, 88, 3; Ps 9:19; 76:9; 1 Ch 28:9; Da 3:34) ἔφθασεν ἐπʼ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ εἰς τέλος 1 Th 2:16 (s. also below and cp. TestLevi 6:11, concerning which there is a variety of opinion). εἰς τέλος ἀπολέσαι τὴν ζωήν lose one’s life forever Hs 8, 8, 5b.—Decisively, extremely, fully, altogether (Polyb. 1, 20, 7; 10; 12, 27, 3 and oft.; Diod S 18, 57, 1 ταπεινωθέντες εἰς τ.=ruined utterly; Lucian, Philop. 14; Appian, Bell. Mithr. 44 §174; OGI 90, 12 [II B.C.]; PTebt 38, 11 [II B.C.]; 49, 11; 793 [s. οὖς 1]; Josh 8:24; 2 Ch 12:12; Ps 73:1; Job 6:9; PsSol 1:1; TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 23 [Stone p. 32]; ApcMos 19; Jos., Vi. 24; Just., A I, 44, 12; Diodorus on Ps 51:7: MPG 33, 1589b εἰς τέλος τουτέστι παντελῶς) 1 Th 2:16 ( forever is also prob.; s. above); B 4:7; 10:5; 19:11. ἱλαρὰ εἰς τέλος ἦν she was quite cheerful Hv 3, 10, 5. Cp. 3, 7, 2; m 12, 2, 3; Hs 6, 2, 3; 8, 6, 4; 8, 8, 2; 5a; 8, 9, 3; 9, 14, 2.—For εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς J 13:1 s. εἰς 3.

δ. ἐν τέλει at the end (opp. πρὸ αἰώνων) IMg 6:1.

③ the goal toward which a movement is being directed, end, goal, outcome (Dio Chrys. 67 [17], 3; Epict. 1, 30, 4; 3, 24, 7; Maximus Tyr. 20, 3b; Jos., Ant. 9, 73; TestAsh 1:3; ἡ θεία παίδευσις καὶ εἰσαγωγὴν ἔχει καὶ προκοπὴν καὶ τ. Did., Gen. 69, 9) Mt 26:58. τὸ τέλος κυρίου the outcome which the Lord brought about in the case of Job’s trials Js 5:11 (Diod S 20, 13, 3 τὸ δαιμόνιον τοῖς ὑπερηφάνως διαλογιζομένοις τὸ τέλος τῶν κατελπισθέντων εἰς τοὐναντίον μετατίθησιν=the divinity, in the case of the arrogant, turns the outcome of what they hoped for to the opposite.—On Js 5:11 s. 1 above). τὸ τέλος τῆς παραγγελίας ἐστὶν ἀγάπη the instruction has love as its aim 1 Ti 1:5 (Ἐπίκουρος … λέγων τὸ τ. τῆς σοφίας εἶναι ἡδονήν Hippol., Ref. 1, 22, 4. τ.=‘goal’ or ‘purpose’: Epict. 1, 20, 15; 4, 8, 12; Diog. L. 2, 87; Just., D. 2, 6). Perh. this is the place for Ro 10:4, in the sense that Christ is the goal and the termination of the law at the same time, somewhat in the sense of Gal 3:24f (schol. on Pla., Leg. 625d τέλος τῶν νόμων=goal of the laws; Plut., Mor. 780e δίκη … νόμου τέλος ἐστί; FFlückiger, TZ 11, ’55, 153–57; difft. RJewett, Int 39, ’85, 341–56, Christ as goal but without repudiation of the law; cp. SBechtler, CBQ 56, ’94, 288–308); s. 1.—Esp. also of the final goal toward which pers. and things are striving, of the outcome or destiny which awaits them in accordance w. their nature (TestAsh 6:4; Philo, Exs. 162, Virt. 182; Just., A II, 3, 7; Ath., R. 24 p. 77, 19; Aelian, VH 3, 43; Alciphron 4, 7, 8; Procop. Soph., Ep. 154; τὸ τ. ὁρόμου Orig., C. Cels. 7, 52, 6) τὸ τέλος ἐκείνων θάνατος … τὸ τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον Ro 6:21f. Cp. 2 Cor 11:15; Phil 3:19 (HKoester, NTS 8, ’61/62, 325f): perh. a play on a mystery term; 1 Pt 4:17 (cp. 2 Macc 7:30–38); Hb 6:8. κομιζόμενοι τὸ τέλος τῆς πίστεως 1 Pt 1:9. τέλος τὰ πράγματα ἔχει all things have a goal or final destiny (i.e. death or life) IMg 5:1 (τέλος ἔχειν as Plut., Mor. 382e; Polyaenus 4, 2, 11 τέλος οὐκ ἔσχεν ἡ πρᾶξις=did not reach its goal; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 181, Ant. 17, 185.—Ael. Aristid. 52 p. 597 D.: τὸ τέλος πάντων πραγμάτων). εἰς τέλος εἶναι be at = reach the goal IRo 1:1 (εἰς for ἐν; s. εἰς 1aδ).

④ last in a series, rest, remainder (Aristot. De Gen. Anim. 1, 18 p. 725b, 8; Is 19:15. Of a military formation Arrian, Tact. 10, 5; 18, 4), if τὸ τέλος 1 Cor 15:24 is to be taken, w. JWeiss and Ltzm., of a third and last group (τάγμα 1b; s. 2a and 2bα above).

⑤ revenue obligation, (indirect) tax, toll-tax, customs duties (X., Pla. et al.; ins, pap; 1 Macc 10:31; 11:35; Jos., Ant. 12, 141) ἀποδιδόναι τὸ τέλος Ro 13:7b; cp. a (w. φόρος as Appian, Sicil. 2, 6, Bell. Civ. 2, 13 §47; Vi. Aesopi W 92; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 10, 22. Pl. w. εἰσφοραί Theoph. Ant. 1, 10 [p. 80, 19]). λαμβάνειν τέλη ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25 (w. κῆνσος; Just., A I, 27, 2).—τὰ τέλη τ. αἰώνων 1 Cor 10:11 is transl. the (spiritual) revenues of the ages by ASouter (Pocket Lex. of the NT 1916, s.v. τέλος) and PMacpherson, ET 55, ’43/44, 222 (s. 2a above).—GDelling, TW VIII, 50–88: τέλος and related words, also ZNW 55, ’64, 26–42=Studien zum NT, ’70, 17–31.—B. 802; 979. Schmidt, Syn. IV 496–523. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

ἀνέχω in our lit. only mid.: impf. ἀνειχόμην (ἠνειχόμην) 3 Macc 1:22, Just.; fut. ἀνέξομαι; 2 aor. ἀνεσχόμην Ac 18:14; v.l. ἠνεσχόμην on the augm. s. W-S. §12, 7; B-D-F §69, 2; Rob. 368 (s. ἀνοχή, ἔχω; Hom.+).

① to regard w. tolerance, endure, bear with, put up with; on its constr. s. B-D-F §176, 1; Rob. 508.

ⓐ τινός someone (Pla., Polit. 8, 564e; Teles p. 18, 6 H.; Gen 45:1; Is 63:15; 3 Macc 1:22; Just., D. 2, 3; 68, 1 μου; 109, 1 λέγοντός μου al.) Hm 4, 4, 1. ὑμῶν Mt 17:17; Mk 9:19; Lk 9:41. μου 2 Cor 11:1b (Appian, Samn. 4 §10 τίς ἀνέξεταί μου). πάντων IPol 1:2. ἀλλήλων ἐν ἀγάπῃ bear w. one another in love Eph 4:2; cp. Col 3:13. τῶν ἀφρόνων foolish people 2 Cor 11:19.

ⓑ something

α. w. gen. (Synes., Prov. 2, 6 p. 226c ἀνέχεσθαι φαύλων εἰκόνων=put up with second-rate pictures; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 36; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 126) τ. λόγου τ. παρακλήσεως listen patiently to the word of exhortation Hb 13:22. τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 2 Ti 4:3.

β. w. acc. (Procop. Soph., Ep. 161 p. 597 κακά; Is 1:13; Job 6:26) or w. gen. (Od. 22, 423; Polyaenus 8, 10, 1; Job 6:26 v.l.; 2 Macc 9:12) of thing πάντα 1 Cl 49:5. τὰ σάββατα Sabbath-observances B 2:5; 15:8 (Is 1:13). ταῦτα ἀ. (w. ὑπομένειν) Dg 2:9. ἀ. μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης put up w. a little foolishness from me 2 Cor 11:1a (Ltzm. ad loc.; the rhetorical topos as Demosth. 18, 160.—Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 103 §480 ἀνέχεσθαι=be pleased with something, consent). ὀλίγα μου ῥήματα ἔτι ἀνάσχου put up w. a few more words from me Hm 4, 2, 1. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 63 §264 Καῖσαρ οὐδὲ τοῦτʼ ἀνασχόμενος; Job 6:26; Jos., Ant. 19:12.

γ. w. adv. καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε you put up with it quite easily 2 Cor 11:4 (cp. εὖ ἀ. PAmh. 3a II, 14 and s. καλῶς 6 [lit.]).

δ. w. εἰ foll. 2 Cor 11:20

ⓒ abs.; but the obj. is easily supplied fr. the context (Vi. Aesopi G 3 [I 36 P.]; Is 42:14; Job 6:11; Just., D. 2, 5 οὐκ ἠνειχόμην εἰς μακρὰν ἀποτιθέμενος ‘I could no longer endure the prospect of spending so much time [on many branches of learning]’: forbear, put up with Dg 9:1f.

② to undergo someth. onerous or troublesome without giving in, endure, ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν αἷς ἀνέχεσθε in the trials that you endure (αἷς can be attraction for ἅς as well as for ὧν, s. W-S §24, 4e; Rob. 716) 2 Th 1:4. διωκόμενοι ἀνεχόμεθα when we are persecuted we endure it 1 Cor 4:12 (use w. ptc. is quite common Thu. et al.; s. e.g. Epict. index Schenkl).

③ accept a complaint legal t.t. κατὰ λόγον ἂν ἀνεσχόμην ὑμῶν I would have been justified in accepting your complaint Ac 18:14.—DELG s.v. 1 ἔχω 392. M-M. TW.

ἔθνος, ους, τό (Hom.+).

① a body of persons united by kinship, culture, and common traditions, nation, people, τὸ ἔθνος τῆς Σαμαρείας the Samaritan people Ac 8:9 (cp. Jos., Ant. 18, 85). τῶν Ἰουδαίων 10:22 (Polyb. in Jos., Ant. 12, 135; Agatharchides: 86 Fgm. 20b Jac. [in Jos., Ant. 12, 6]; Diod S 34+35 Fgm. 1, 2 τὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἔθνος; Philo, Decal. 96 al.; Just., D. 56, 10 ὑμῶν al.) ἐ. the (specific) people, contextually the people of Israel (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 5, 15, 24; Did., Gen. 209, 14) J 11:48, 50ff; 18:35. δώδεκα ἔ. Hs 9, 17, 2.—B 13:2 (Gen 25:23); ἔθνη ἑπτὰ ἐν γῇ Χανάαν seven nations in Canaan Ac 13:19 (Dt 7:1). The people in contrast to heads of state 9:15. ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος one nation against another Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:10 (cp. 2 Ch 15:6); πάντα τὰ ἔ. (Ar. 12, 1; Ath. 14, 2; cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 106 §440 ἐν ἔθνεσιν ἅπασι; Jos., Ant. 11, 215 ἅπαντα τὰ ἔ.) Mt 24:14; 28:19 (SKio, BT 41, ’90, 230–38, prefers 2 below); Mk 11:17 (Is 56:7); 13:10. More specif. πάντα τὰ ἔ. τοῦ κόσμου Lk 12:30; cp. ἅπαντα τὰ ἔ. 1 Cl 59:4; ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔ. 2 Cl 13:2. πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων every nation of humankind Ac 17:26. ἄρχοντες ἐθνῶν Mt 20:25; also οἱ δοκοῦντες ἄρχειν τῶν ἐ. Mk 10:42; οἱ βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐ. Lk 22:25 (cp. Ath. 34, 2 ἡγεμόνας τῶν ἐ.).—In Mt 21:43 ἔ. (not gentiles) in contrast to the leaders described vv. 23; 45.

② (τὰ) ἔθνη people groups foreign to a specific people group (corresp. to Heb. גּוֹיִם in LXX; a nationalistic expression, also usu. in Gk. for foreigners: Aristot., Pol. 1324b, 10 [opp. Ἕλληνες]; Ael. Aristid. 45, p. 3 D.; Cass. Dio 36, 41; Ps.-Callisth. 2, 7, 4 [opp. ἡ Ἑλλάς]; IG II/1, 445 Fgm. ab, 8; Fgm. c, 5; 448, 15 and 17 [c. 150 B.C.]; SIG 760; PStras 22, 19; PFay 20, 11; this is an expression favored by Appian in Rome for foreign peoples in contrast to the Italians: Bell. Civ. 2, 26 §99; 2, 28 §107; 3, 35 §140; 4, 57 §246 and oft.; s. Nägeli 46; B-D-F §254, 3) in our lit.

ⓐ those who do not belong to groups professing faith in the God of Israel, the nations, gentiles, unbelievers (in effect=‘polytheists’) w. ἡγεμόνες κ. βασιλεῖς Mt 10:18. Named w. Israelites (Jos., Ant. 13, 196; cp. SibOr 3, 663; Just., A I, 53, 3ff and D. 123, 2 al.) Ac 14:5; 21:21; 26:17; Ro 3:29; 9:24; 15:10 (Dt 32:43); ISm 1:2. They, too, are to share in salvation (Did., Gen. 182, 19); cp. Ac 11:1, 18; 14:27; 15:3, 7; cp. 2 Cl 13:3 (Just., D. 26, 1 al.) (MKiddle, The Admission of the Gentiles in Lk and Ac: JTS 36, ’35, 160–73; JJeremias, Jesu Verheissung für die Völker ’56 [lit.], Eng. tr. Jesus’ Promise to the Nations ’58). But s. Mt 10:5f (MHooker, ET 82, ’71, 361–65). Their sacrificial rites 1 Cor 10:20 v.l. Paul as διδάσκαλος ἐθνῶν 1 Ti 2:7; 2 Ti 1:11 v.l. Contrasted w. Christians Hs 1:10. Offended by Christian behavior ITr 8:2.

ⓑ non-Israelite Christians, gentiles of Christian congregations composed of more than one nationality and not limited to people of Israel (οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν πιστεύοντες Orig., C. Cels. 2, 1, 9; 8, 29, 24): πᾶσαι αἱ ἐκκλησίαι τῶν ἐθνῶν Ro 16:4, and their members: μετὰ τῶν ἐθνῶν συνήσθιεν it was his custom to eat w. gentile (non-Israelite) Christians Gal 2:12; cp. vs. 14. ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν τῶν ἐθνῶν for you gentile Christians Eph 3:1. Somet. the word connotes Israelite allegations of religious and moral inferiority of gentiles Mt 6:32 (s. Goodsp., Probs., 26f); Lk 12:30; Hm 4, 1, 9; ἔ. καὶ ἁμαρτωλοί Hs 4:4 al. ἄνομα ἔ. lawless gentiles (= polytheists) MPol 9:2. Contrasted w. the δίκαιοι (w. ἀποστάται) Hv 1, 4, 2; cp. 2, 2, 5.—RFeldmeier/UHeckel, edd., Die Heiden ’94 (essays by a number of scholars); JLaGrand, Proliferation of the ‘Gentile’ in the NRSV: BR 41, ’96, 77–87 (against use of ‘Gentiles’ as a rendering of ἔθνη).—B. 1315; 1489. M-M. TW. Sv.